OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/scarts/scarts/trunk

Subversion Repositories scarts

[/] [scarts/] [trunk/] [toolchain/] [scarts-binutils/] [binutils-2.19.1/] [ld/] [ld.info] - Blame information for rev 6

Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 6 jlechner
This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from ld.texinfo.
2
 
3
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
4
* Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
5
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
6
 
7
   This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.18.90.
8
 
9
   Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
10
2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
11
 
12
   Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
13
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
14
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
15
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
16
Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
17
Free Documentation License".
18
 
19

20
File: ld.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Overview,  Up: (dir)
21
 
22
LD
23
**
24
 
25
This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.18.90.
26
 
27
   This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
28
Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
29
section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
30
 
31
* Menu:
32
 
33
* Overview::                    Overview
34
* Invocation::                  Invocation
35
* Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
36
 
37
* Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
38
 
39
* BFD::                         BFD
40
 
41
* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
42
* MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
43
* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
44
* LD Index::                       LD Index
45
 
46

47
File: ld.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
48
 
49
1 Overview
50
**********
51
 
52
`ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
53
data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
54
a program is to run `ld'.
55
 
56
   `ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
57
AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
58
total control over the linking process.
59
 
60
   This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
61
operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
62
object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
63
Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
64
of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.
65
 
66
   Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
67
linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
68
execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
69
`ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
70
some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
71
 
72

73
File: ld.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Scripts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top
74
 
75
2 Invocation
76
************
77
 
78
The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
79
to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
80
have many choices to control its behavior.
81
 
82
* Menu:
83
 
84
* Options::                     Command Line Options
85
* Environment::                 Environment Variables
86
 
87

88
File: ld.info,  Node: Options,  Next: Environment,  Up: Invocation
89
 
90
2.1 Command Line Options
91
========================
92
 
93
   The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
94
practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
95
a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
96
standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
97
`hello.o':
98
 
99
     ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
100
 
101
   This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
102
linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
103
which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
104
discussion of the `-l' option below.)
105
 
106
   Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
107
point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
108
as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
109
option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
110
other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
111
argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
112
occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
113
option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
114
noted in the descriptions below.
115
 
116
   Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
117
linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
118
command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
119
placed between an option and its argument.
120
 
121
   Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
122
can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
123
script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
124
specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
125
message `No input files'.
126
 
127
   If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
128
assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
129
augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
130
linker script or the one specified by using `-T').  This feature
131
permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
132
or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
133
`INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects.  Specifying a script in this
134
way merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands
135
placed after the main script; use the `-T' option to replace the
136
default linker script entirely, but note the effect of the `INSERT'
137
command.  *Note Scripts::.
138
 
139
   For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
140
either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
141
given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
142
requires them.
143
 
144
   For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
145
can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
146
`--trace-symbol' are equivalent.  Note--there is one exception to this
147
rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
148
only be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
149
`-o' option.  So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
150
`magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
151
 
152
   Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
153
the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
154
immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
155
`--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent.  Unique
156
abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
157
 
158
   Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
159
driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
160
prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
161
compiler driver) like this:
162
 
163
       gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
164
 
165
   This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
166
silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
167
 
168
   Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
169
GNU linker:
170
 
171
`@FILE'
172
     Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are
173
     inserted in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not
174
     exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
175
     literally, and not removed.
176
 
177
     Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
178
     character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
179
     option in either single or double quotes.  Any character
180
     (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
181
     to be included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain
182
     additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
183
     recursively.
184
 
185
`-aKEYWORD'
186
     This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
187
     argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
188
     `default'.  `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
189
     and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
190
     `-Bdynamic'.  This option may be used any number of times.
191
 
192
`-AARCHITECTURE'
193
`--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
194
     In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
195
     Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that `ld' configuration, the
196
     ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
197
     the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
198
     archive-library search path.  *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
199
     i960, for details.
200
 
201
     Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
202
     other architecture families.
203
 
204
`-b INPUT-FORMAT'
205
`--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
206
     `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
207
     file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
208
     option to specify the binary format for input object files that
209
     follow this option on the command line.  Even when `ld' is
210
     configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
211
     usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
212
     expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
213
     machine.  INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
214
     format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the
215
     available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  *Note BFD::.
216
 
217
     You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
218
     unusual binary format.  You can also use `-b' to switch formats
219
     explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
220
     including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
221
     particular format.
222
 
223
     The default format is taken from the environment variable
224
     `GNUTARGET'.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
225
     format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format
226
     Commands::.
227
 
228
`-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
229
`--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
230
     For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
231
     files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
232
     described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI.  Introduce
233
     MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
234
     linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
235
     language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
236
     directories specified by any `-L' options.
237
 
238
`-d'
239
`-dc'
240
`-dp'
241
     These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
242
     for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
243
     symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
244
     `-r').  The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
245
     effect.  *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
246
 
247
`-e ENTRY'
248
`--entry=ENTRY'
249
     Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
250
     program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
251
     symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
252
     and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
253
     in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
254
     `0' for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
255
     and other ways of specifying the entry point.
256
 
257
`--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
258
     Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
259
     not be automatically exported. The library names may be delimited
260
     by commas or colons.  Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
261
     symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This
262
     option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
263
     linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
264
     explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
265
     this option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
266
     option will be treated as hidden.
267
 
268
`-E'
269
`--export-dynamic'
270
     When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to
271
     the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table is the set of
272
     symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
273
 
274
     If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will
275
     normally contain only those symbols which are referenced by some
276
     dynamic object mentioned in the link.
277
 
278
     If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
279
     back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
280
     dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
281
     linking the program itself.
282
 
283
     You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
284
     be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
285
     it.  See the description of `--dynamic-list'.
286
 
287
`-EB'
288
     Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
289
 
290
`-EL'
291
     Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
292
     format.
293
 
294
`-f'
295
`--auxiliary NAME'
296
     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
297
     field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
298
     the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
299
     auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
300
 
301
     If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
302
     you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
303
     field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
304
     object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
305
     shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
306
     the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
307
     not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
308
     alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
309
     debugging or for machine specific performance.
310
 
311
     This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
312
     entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
313
     command line.
314
 
315
`-F NAME'
316
`--filter NAME'
317
     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
318
     field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
319
     the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
320
     should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
321
     object NAME.
322
 
323
     If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
324
     you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
325
     field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
326
     symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
327
     link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
328
     filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
329
     provided by the object NAME.
330
 
331
     Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
332
     toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
333
     output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
334
     this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
335
     `TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
336
     environment variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
337
     when not creating an ELF shared object.
338
 
339
`-fini NAME'
340
     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
341
     the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
342
     the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_fini'
343
     as the function to call.
344
 
345
`-g'
346
     Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
347
 
348
`-GVALUE'
349
`--gpsize=VALUE'
350
     Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
351
     register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
352
     such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
353
     into different sections.  This is ignored for other object file
354
     formats.
355
 
356
`-hNAME'
357
`-soname=NAME'
358
     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
359
     field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
360
     shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
361
     executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
362
     shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
363
     using the file name given to the linker.
364
 
365
`-i'
366
     Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
367
 
368
`-init NAME'
369
     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
370
     the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
371
     the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_init'
372
     as the function to call.
373
 
374
`-lNAMESPEC'
375
`--library=NAMESPEC'
376
     Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list
377
     of files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.
378
     If NAMESPEC is of the form `:FILENAME', `ld' will search the
379
     library path for a file called FILENAME, otherise it will search
380
     the library path for a file called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
381
 
382
     On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
383
     files other than `libNAMESPEC.a'.  Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
384
     systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library called
385
     `libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
386
     (By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
387
     Note that this behavior does not apply to `:FILENAME', which
388
     always specifies a file called FILENAME.
389
 
390
     The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
391
     it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
392
     symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
393
     the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
394
     appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined
395
     symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
396
     cause the linker to search the archive again.
397
 
398
     See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
399
     archives multiple times.
400
 
401
     You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
402
 
403
     This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
404
     However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
405
     from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
406
 
407
`-LSEARCHDIR'
408
`--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
409
     Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
410
     archive libraries and `ld' control scripts.  You may use this
411
     option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
412
     order in which they are specified on the command line.
413
     Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
414
     default directories.  All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
415
     regardless of the order in which the options appear.
416
 
417
     If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
418
     "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
419
 
420
     The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
421
     `-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
422
     cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.
423
 
424
     The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
425
     `SEARCH_DIR' command.  Directories specified this way are searched
426
     at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
427
     line.
428
 
429
`-mEMULATION'
430
     Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
431
     emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
432
 
433
     If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
434
     `LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
435
 
436
     Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
437
     configured.
438
 
439
`-M'
440
`--print-map'
441
     Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
442
     information about the link, including the following:
443
 
444
        * Where object files are mapped into memory.
445
 
446
        * How common symbols are allocated.
447
 
448
        * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
449
          the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
450
 
451
        * The values assigned to symbols.
452
 
453
          Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
454
          which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
455
          symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
456
          This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
457
          only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
458
          circumstances the linker will display the final value
459
          enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker
460
          script containing:
461
 
462
                  foo = 1
463
                  foo = foo * 4
464
                  foo = foo + 8
465
 
466
          will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
467
          option is used:
468
 
469
                  0x00000001                foo = 0x1
470
                  [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
471
                  [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
472
 
473
          See *Note Expressions:: for more information about
474
          expressions in linker scripts.
475
 
476
`-n'
477
`--nmagic'
478
     Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
479
     `NMAGIC' if possible.
480
 
481
`-N'
482
`--omagic'
483
     Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
484
     do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
485
     shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
486
     numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
487
     text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
488
     to the format specification published by Microsoft.
489
 
490
`--no-omagic'
491
     This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option.  It
492
     sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
493
     to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
494
     against shared libraries.  Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
495
 
496
`-o OUTPUT'
497
`--output=OUTPUT'
498
     Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
499
     option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default.  The
500
     script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
501
 
502
`-O LEVEL'
503
     If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
504
     output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
505
     probably should only be enabled for the final binary.  At the
506
     moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
507
     Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
508
     Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour
509
     for different non-zero values of this option.  Again this may
510
     change with future releases.
511
 
512
`-q'
513
`--emit-relocs'
514
     Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
515
     Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this
516
     information in order to perform correct modifications of
517
     executables.  This results in larger executables.
518
 
519
     This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
520
 
521
`--force-dynamic'
522
     Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
523
     specific to VxWorks targets.
524
 
525
`-r'
526
`--relocatable'
527
     Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
528
     can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  This is often called "partial
529
     linking".  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
530
     Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
531
     number to `OMAGIC'.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
532
     file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
533
     not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
534
 
535
     When an input file does not have the same format as the output
536
     file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
537
     not contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have
538
     further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
539
     not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
540
     all.
541
 
542
     This option does the same thing as `-i'.
543
 
544
`-R FILENAME'
545
`--just-symbols=FILENAME'
546
     Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
547
     relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
548
     file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
549
     in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.
550
 
551
     For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
552
     followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
553
     treated as the `-rpath' option.
554
 
555
`-s'
556
`--strip-all'
557
     Omit all symbol information from the output file.
558
 
559
`-S'
560
`--strip-debug'
561
     Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
562
     output file.
563
 
564
`-t'
565
`--trace'
566
     Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
567
 
568
`-T SCRIPTFILE'
569
`--script=SCRIPTFILE'
570
     Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces `ld''s
571
     default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
572
     must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
573
     *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
574
     directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
575
     preceding `-L' options.  Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
576
 
577
`-dT SCRIPTFILE'
578
`--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
579
     Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script.  *Note Scripts::.
580
 
581
     This option is similar to the `--script' option except that
582
     processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
583
     command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after
584
     the `--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
585
     behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
586
     linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.
587
     (eg because the command line is being constructed by another tool,
588
     such as `gcc').
589
 
590
`-u SYMBOL'
591
`--undefined=SYMBOL'
592
     Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
593
     symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
594
     modules from standard libraries.  `-u' may be repeated with
595
     different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
596
     This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
597
 
598
`-Ur'
599
     For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
600
     `-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
601
     can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  When linking C++ programs,
602
     `-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'.  It
603
     does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
604
     with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
605
     be added to.  Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
606
     for the others.
607
 
608
`--unique[=SECTION]'
609
     Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
610
     SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
611
     for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
612
     specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
613
     multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal
614
     merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
615
     section assignments in a linker script.
616
 
617
`-v'
618
`--version'
619
`-V'
620
     Display the version number for `ld'.  The `-V' option also lists
621
     the supported emulations.
622
 
623
`-x'
624
`--discard-all'
625
     Delete all local symbols.
626
 
627
`-X'
628
`--discard-locals'
629
     Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
630
     system-specific local label prefixes, typically `.L' for ELF
631
     systems or `L' for traditional a.out systems.)
632
 
633
`-y SYMBOL'
634
`--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
635
     Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
636
     option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
637
     necessary to prepend an underscore.
638
 
639
     This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
640
     link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
641
 
642
`-Y PATH'
643
     Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
644
     for Solaris compatibility.
645
 
646
`-z KEYWORD'
647
     The recognized keywords are:
648
    `combreloc'
649
          Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
650
          dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
651
 
652
    `defs'
653
          Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined
654
          symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
655
 
656
    `execstack'
657
          Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
658
 
659
    `initfirst'
660
          This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
661
          It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
662
          occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
663
          brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
664
          runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
665
          runtime finalization of any other objects.
666
 
667
    `interpose'
668
          Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
669
          symbols but the primary executable.
670
 
671
    `lazy'
672
          When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
673
          tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
674
          the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
675
          than at load time.  Lazy binding is the default.
676
 
677
    `loadfltr'
678
          Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
679
          runtime.
680
 
681
    `muldefs'
682
          Allows multiple definitions.
683
 
684
    `nocombreloc'
685
          Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
686
 
687
    `nocopyreloc'
688
          Disables production of copy relocs.
689
 
690
    `nodefaultlib'
691
          Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
692
          object will ignore any default library search paths.
693
 
694
    `nodelete'
695
          Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
696
 
697
    `nodlopen'
698
          Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
699
 
700
    `nodump'
701
          Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
702
 
703
    `noexecstack'
704
          Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
705
 
706
    `norelro'
707
          Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
708
          object.
709
 
710
    `now'
711
          When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
712
          tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
713
          program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
714
          using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
715
          to the point when the function is first called.
716
 
717
    `origin'
718
          Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
719
 
720
    `relro'
721
          Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
722
 
723
    `max-page-size=VALUE'
724
          Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE.
725
 
726
    `common-page-size=VALUE'
727
          Set the emulation common page size to VALUE.
728
 
729
 
730
     Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
731
 
732
`-( ARCHIVES -)'
733
`--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
734
     The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be
735
     either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
736
 
737
     The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
738
     undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is
739
     searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
740
     command line.  If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
741
     undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
742
     appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
743
     resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives, they all be
744
     searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
745
 
746
     Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
747
     to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
748
     between two or more archives.
749
 
750
`--accept-unknown-input-arch'
751
`--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
752
     Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
753
     recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
754
     doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
755
     This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release
756
     2.14.  The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to
757
     reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
758
     option has been added to restore the old behaviour.
759
 
760
`--as-needed'
761
`--no-as-needed'
762
     This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
763
     mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
764
     Normally, the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
765
     library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
766
     library is actually needed.  `--as-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags
767
     to only be emitted for libraries that satisfy some symbol
768
     reference from regular objects which is undefined at the point
769
     that the library was linked.  `--no-as-needed' restores the
770
     default behaviour.
771
 
772
`--add-needed'
773
`--no-add-needed'
774
     This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
775
     DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line
776
     after the `--no-add-needed' option.  Normally, the linker will add
777
     a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
778
     `--no-add-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted for
779
     those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. `--add-needed' restores the
780
     default behaviour.
781
 
782
`-assert KEYWORD'
783
     This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
784
 
785
`-Bdynamic'
786
`-dy'
787
`-call_shared'
788
     Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
789
     platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option
790
     is normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants
791
     of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
792
     may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
793
     library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
794
 
795
`-Bgroup'
796
     Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
797
     section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
798
     object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
799
     `--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied.  This option is only
800
     meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
801
 
802
`-Bstatic'
803
`-dn'
804
`-non_shared'
805
`-static'
806
     Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
807
     platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
808
     variants of this option are for compatibility with various
809
     systems.  You may use this option multiple times on the command
810
     line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
811
     it.  This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
812
     This option can be used with `-shared'.  Doing so means that a
813
     shared library is being created but that all of the library's
814
     external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
815
     static libraries.
816
 
817
`-Bsymbolic'
818
     When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
819
     to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
820
     is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
821
     override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
822
     only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
823
 
824
`-Bsymbolic-functions'
825
     When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
826
     symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.  This
827
     option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
828
     libraries.
829
 
830
`--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
831
     Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
832
     typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
833
     global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
834
     definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
835
     linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
836
     added to the symbol table in the executable.  This option is only
837
     meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
838
 
839
     The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
840
     without scope and node name.  See *Note VERSION:: for more
841
     information.
842
 
843
`--dynamic-list-data'
844
     Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
845
 
846
`--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
847
     Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
848
     It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
849
 
850
`--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
851
     Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
852
     identification.
853
 
854
`--check-sections'
855
`--no-check-sections'
856
     Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
857
     been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
858
     linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
859
     will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
860
     and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
861
     behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
862
     `--check-sections'.
863
 
864
`--cref'
865
     Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
866
     generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
867
     Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
868
 
869
     The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
870
     easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are
871
     printed out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file
872
     names is given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
873
     is the location of the definition.  The remaining files contain
874
     references to the symbol.
875
 
876
`--no-define-common'
877
     This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
878
     The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
879
     *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
880
 
881
     The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
882
     assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
883
     file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
884
     assigning addresses to Common symbols.  Using `--no-define-common'
885
     allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
886
     be assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates
887
     the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
888
     prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
889
     duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
890
     search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
891
 
892
`--defsym SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
893
     Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
894
     address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many
895
     times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
896
     A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
897
     this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
898
     an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
899
     hexadecimal constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate
900
     expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
901
     script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
902
     _Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
903
     sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
904
 
905
`--demangle[=STYLE]'
906
`--no-demangle'
907
     These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
908
     messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle,
909
     it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
910
     leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
911
     and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
912
     Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
913
     demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
914
     demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
915
     default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
916
     set.  These options may be used to override the default.
917
 
918
`--dynamic-linker FILE'
919
     Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
920
     generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
921
     linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
922
     you are doing.
923
 
924
`--fatal-warnings'
925
`--no-fatal-warnings'
926
     Treat all warnings as errors.  The default behaviour can be
927
     restored with the option `--no-fatal-warnings'.
928
 
929
`--force-exe-suffix'
930
     Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
931
 
932
     If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
933
     `.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
934
     output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
935
     option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
936
     Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
937
     an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
938
 
939
`--gc-sections'
940
`--no-gc-sections'
941
     Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
942
     on targets that do not support this option.  The default behaviour
943
     (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
944
     specifying `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
945
 
946
     `--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining
947
     symbols and relocations.  The section containing the entry symbol
948
     and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
949
     will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
950
     dynamic objects.  Note that when building shared libraries, the
951
     linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced.  Once
952
     this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
953
     recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
954
     relocations.  See `--entry' and `--undefined'.
955
 
956
     This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
957
     option `-r').  In this case the root of symbols kept must be
958
     explicitely specified either by an `--entry' or `--undefined'
959
     option or by a `ENTRY' command in the linker script.
960
 
961
`--print-gc-sections'
962
`--no-print-gc-sections'
963
     List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
964
     printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
965
     collection has been enabled via the `--gc-sections') option.  The
966
     default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
967
     can be restored by specifying `--no-print-gc-sections' on the
968
     command line.
969
 
970
`--help'
971
     Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
972
     and exit.
973
 
974
`--target-help'
975
     Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
976
     output and exit.
977
 
978
`-Map MAPFILE'
979
     Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
980
     `-M' option, above.
981
 
982
`--no-keep-memory'
983
     `ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
984
     symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells `ld' to
985
     instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
986
     as necessary.  This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
987
     space while linking a large executable.
988
 
989
`--no-undefined'
990
`-z defs'
991
     Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
992
     This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
993
     library.  The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
994
     behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
995
     libraries being linked in.
996
 
997
`--allow-multiple-definition'
998
`-z muldefs'
999
     Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1000
     report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
1001
     the first definition will be used.
1002
 
1003
`--allow-shlib-undefined'
1004
`--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
1005
     Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared
1006
     libraries.  This switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that
1007
     it determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1008
     shared library rather than a regular object file.  It does not
1009
     affect how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1010
 
1011
     The reason that `--allow-shlib-undefined' is the default is that
1012
     the shared library being specified at link time may not be the
1013
     same as the one that is available at load time, so the symbols
1014
     might actually be resolvable at load time.  Plus there are some
1015
     systems, (eg BeOS) where undefined symbols in shared libraries is
1016
     normal.  (The kernel patches them at load time to select which
1017
     function is most appropriate for the current architecture.  This
1018
     is used for example to dynamically select an appropriate memset
1019
     function).  Apparently it is also normal for HPPA shared libraries
1020
     to have undefined symbols.
1021
 
1022
`--no-undefined-version'
1023
     Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
1024
     ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
1025
     and a fatal error will be issued instead.
1026
 
1027
`--default-symver'
1028
     Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
1029
     unversioned exported symbols.
1030
 
1031
`--default-imported-symver'
1032
     Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
1033
     unversioned imported symbols.
1034
 
1035
`--no-warn-mismatch'
1036
     Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
1037
     files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
1038
     have been compiled for different processors or for different
1039
     endiannesses.  This option tells `ld' that it should silently
1040
     permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
1041
     care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
1042
     ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
1043
 
1044
`--no-warn-search-mismatch'
1045
     Normally `ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1046
     library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.
1047
 
1048
`--no-whole-archive'
1049
     Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
1050
     archive files.
1051
 
1052
`--noinhibit-exec'
1053
     Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1054
     Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
1055
     encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
1056
     writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
1057
 
1058
`-nostdlib'
1059
     Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1060
     command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
1061
     (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
1062
     ignored.
1063
 
1064
`--oformat OUTPUT-FORMAT'
1065
     `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1066
     file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
1067
     `--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
1068
     object file.  Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
1069
     object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
1070
     should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1071
     usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
1072
     name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
1073
     can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  The
1074
     script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
1075
     but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.
1076
 
1077
`-pie'
1078
`--pic-executable'
1079
     Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
1080
     supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
1081
     similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
1082
     dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
1083
     (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
1084
     linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
1085
     executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1086
 
1087
`-qmagic'
1088
     This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1089
 
1090
`-Qy'
1091
     This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1092
 
1093
`--relax'
1094
     An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
1095
     supported on a few targets.  *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
1096
     *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960.  *Note `ld' and Xtensa
1097
     Processors: Xtensa.  *Note `ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12:
1098
     M68HC11/68HC12.  *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
1099
     PowerPC ELF32.
1100
 
1101
     On some platforms, the `--relax' option performs global
1102
     optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1103
     addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes and
1104
     synthesizing new instructions in the output object file.
1105
 
1106
     On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
1107
     symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This
1108
     is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1109
     family of processors.
1110
 
1111
     On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
1112
     but ignored.
1113
 
1114
`--retain-symbols-file FILENAME'
1115
     Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
1116
     all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
1117
     per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
1118
     as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
1119
     gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
1120
 
1121
     `--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
1122
     symbols needed for relocations.
1123
 
1124
     You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
1125
     line.  It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
1126
 
1127
`-rpath DIR'
1128
     Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
1129
     when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All `-rpath'
1130
     arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
1131
     uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The `-rpath'
1132
     option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
1133
     by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1134
     description of the `-rpath-link' option.  If `-rpath' is not used
1135
     when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
1136
     variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
1137
 
1138
     The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
1139
     SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1140
     `-L' options it is given.  If a `-rpath' option is used, the
1141
     runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
1142
     options, ignoring the `-L' options.  This can be useful when using
1143
     gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
1144
     systems.
1145
 
1146
     For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
1147
     followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
1148
     treated as the `-rpath' option.
1149
 
1150
`-rpath-link DIR'
1151
     When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
1152
     This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
1153
     as one of the input files.
1154
 
1155
     When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
1156
     non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
1157
     locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
1158
     it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
1159
     option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
1160
     `-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
1161
     either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1162
     appearing multiple times.
1163
 
1164
     This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
1165
     path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
1166
     such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
1167
     search path than the runtime linker would do.
1168
 
1169
     The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
1170
     shared libraries:
1171
       1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
1172
 
1173
       2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options.  The difference
1174
          between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
1175
          specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
1176
          and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
1177
          effective at link time. Searching `-rpath' in this way is
1178
          only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
1179
          been configured with the `--with-sysroot' option.
1180
 
1181
       3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the `-rpath' and
1182
          `-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of
1183
          the environment variable `LD_RUN_PATH'.
1184
 
1185
       4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
1186
          directories specified using `-L' options.
1187
 
1188
       5. For a native linker, the search the contents of the
1189
          environment variable `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
1190
 
1191
       6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
1192
          `DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
1193
          libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
1194
          `DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
1195
 
1196
       7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
1197
 
1198
       8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
1199
          `/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
1200
          that file.
1201
 
1202
     If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
1203
     a warning and continue with the link.
1204
 
1205
`-shared'
1206
`-Bshareable'
1207
     Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
1208
     XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will
1209
     automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
1210
     used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
1211
 
1212
`--sort-common [= ascending | descending]'
1213
     This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1214
     ascending or descending order when it places them in the
1215
     appropriate output sections.  The symbol alignments considered are
1216
     sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
1217
     one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
1218
     constraints.  If no sorting order is specified, then descending
1219
     order is assumed.
1220
 
1221
`--sort-section name'
1222
     This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
1223
     patterns in the linker script.
1224
 
1225
`--sort-section alignment'
1226
     This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
1227
     patterns in the linker script.
1228
 
1229
`--split-by-file [SIZE]'
1230
     Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
1231
     each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of
1232
     1 if not given.
1233
 
1234
`--split-by-reloc [COUNT]'
1235
     Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
1236
     single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
1237
     relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable
1238
     files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
1239
     object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
1240
     relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
1241
     with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
1242
     The linker will not split up individual input sections for
1243
     redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
1244
     COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
1245
     relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
1246
 
1247
`--stats'
1248
     Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
1249
     such as execution time and memory usage.
1250
 
1251
`--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
1252
     Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1253
     configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
1254
     that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
1255
 
1256
`--traditional-format'
1257
     For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
1258
     the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests `ld' to
1259
     use the traditional format instead.
1260
 
1261
     For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
1262
     symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
1263
     with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
1264
     Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
1265
     program (`gdb' has no trouble).  The `--traditional-format' switch
1266
     tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
1267
 
1268
`--section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG'
1269
     Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
1270
     by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
1271
     locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a
1272
     single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
1273
     you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
1274
     values.  _Note:_ there should be no white space between
1275
     SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
1276
 
1277
`-Tbss ORG'
1278
`-Tdata ORG'
1279
`-Ttext ORG'
1280
     Same as -section-start, with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
1281
     SECTIONNAME.
1282
 
1283
`--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
1284
     Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
1285
     possible values for `method':
1286
 
1287
    `ignore-all'
1288
          Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1289
 
1290
    `report-all'
1291
          Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
1292
 
1293
    `ignore-in-object-files'
1294
          Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
1295
          libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
1296
          files.
1297
 
1298
    `ignore-in-shared-libs'
1299
          Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
1300
          files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
1301
          This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
1302
          known that all the shared libraries that it should be
1303
          referencing are included on the linker's command line.
1304
 
1305
     The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
1306
     controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
1307
 
1308
     Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
1309
     reported unresolved symbol but the option
1310
     `--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
1311
 
1312
`--dll-verbose'
1313
`--verbose'
1314
     Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
1315
     supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
1316
     Display the linker script being used by the linker.
1317
 
1318
`--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
1319
     Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
1320
     typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
1321
     additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
1322
     being created.  This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1323
     which support shared libraries.  *Note VERSION::.
1324
 
1325
`--warn-common'
1326
     Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
1327
     or with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat
1328
     sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do
1329
     not.  This option allows you to find potential problems from
1330
     combining global symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use
1331
     this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
1332
     libraries as well as in your programs.
1333
 
1334
     There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
1335
     examples:
1336
 
1337
    `int i = 1;'
1338
          A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
1339
          the output file.
1340
 
1341
    `extern int i;'
1342
          An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
1343
          must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1344
          variable somewhere.
1345
 
1346
    `int i;'
1347
          A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
1348
          symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
1349
          area of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common
1350
          symbols for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they
1351
          are of different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The
1352
          linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1353
          a definition of the same variable.
1354
 
1355
     The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1356
     Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
1357
     symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
1358
     symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
1359
     symbols will be a common symbol.
1360
 
1361
       1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
1362
          already a definition for the symbol.
1363
               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
1364
                  overridden by definition
1365
               FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
1366
 
1367
       2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
1368
          definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same
1369
          as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
1370
          in a different order.
1371
               FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
1372
                  overriding common
1373
               FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
1374
 
1375
       3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
1376
          symbol.
1377
               FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
1378
                  of `SYMBOL'
1379
               FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
1380
 
1381
       4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1382
               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
1383
                  overridden by larger common
1384
               FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
1385
 
1386
       5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
1387
          symbol.  This is the same as the previous case, except that
1388
          the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1389
               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
1390
                  overriding smaller common
1391
               FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
1392
 
1393
`--warn-constructors'
1394
     Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
1395
     a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
1396
     linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
1397
 
1398
`--warn-multiple-gp'
1399
     Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
1400
     file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
1401
     Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
1402
     in a special section.  A special register (the global pointer)
1403
     points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
1404
     loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
1405
     Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
1406
     relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
1407
     the constant pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
1408
     to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
1409
     address all possible constants.  This option causes a warning to
1410
     be issued whenever this case occurs.
1411
 
1412
`--warn-once'
1413
     Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
1414
     module which refers to it.
1415
 
1416
`--warn-section-align'
1417
     Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1418
     alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
1419
     section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
1420
     specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
1421
     start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
1422
 
1423
`--warn-shared-textrel'
1424
     Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
1425
 
1426
`--warn-unresolved-symbols'
1427
     If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
1428
     option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
1429
     This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1430
 
1431
`--error-unresolved-symbols'
1432
     This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
1433
     when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1434
 
1435
`--whole-archive'
1436
     For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
1437
     `--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
1438
     in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
1439
     object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into
1440
     a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
1441
     resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.
1442
 
1443
     Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
1444
     about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
1445
     Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
1446
     list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1447
     your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1448
 
1449
`--wrap SYMBOL'
1450
     Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
1451
     SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  Any undefined
1452
     reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
1453
 
1454
     This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
1455
     wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  If it wishes
1456
     to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
1457
 
1458
     Here is a trivial example:
1459
 
1460
          void *
1461
          __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
1462
          {
1463
            printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
1464
            return __real_malloc (c);
1465
          }
1466
 
1467
     If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
1468
     all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
1469
     instead.  The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
1470
     the real `malloc' function.
1471
 
1472
     You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
1473
     links without the `--wrap' option will succeed.  If you do this,
1474
     you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
1475
     file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1476
     call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
1477
 
1478
`--eh-frame-hdr'
1479
     Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
1480
     `PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
1481
 
1482
`--enable-new-dtags'
1483
`--disable-new-dtags'
1484
     This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
1485
     ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
1486
     `--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1487
     If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
1488
     created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note
1489
     that those options are only available for ELF systems.
1490
 
1491
`--hash-size=NUMBER'
1492
     Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
1493
     close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
1494
     time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
1495
     increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
1496
     this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
1497
     speed.
1498
 
1499
`--hash-style=STYLE'
1500
     Set the type of linker's hash table(s).  STYLE can be either
1501
     `sysv' for classic ELF `.hash' section, `gnu' for new style GNU
1502
     `.gnu.hash' section or `both' for both the classic ELF `.hash' and
1503
     new style GNU `.gnu.hash' hash tables.  The default is `sysv'.
1504
 
1505
`--reduce-memory-overheads'
1506
     This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
1507
     expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
1508
     O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
1509
     O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
1510
 
1511
     Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
1512
     to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
1513
     linker's run time.  This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
1514
     switch has been used.
1515
 
1516
     The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
1517
     enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
1518
 
1519
`--build-id'
1520
`--build-id=STYLE'
1521
     Request creation of `.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section.  The
1522
     contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked file.
1523
     STYLE can be `uuid' to use 128 random bits, `sha1' to use a
1524
     160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
1525
     `md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on the normative parts of the
1526
     output contents, or `0xHEXSTRING' to use a chosen bit string
1527
     specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (`-' and `:'
1528
     characters between digit pairs are ignored).  If STYLE is omitted,
1529
     `sha1' is used.
1530
 
1531
     The `md5' and `sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always
1532
     the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
1533
     nonidentical output files.  It is not intended to be compared as a
1534
     checksum for the file's contents.  A linked file may be changed
1535
     later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
1536
     original linked file does not change.
1537
 
1538
     Passing `none' for STYLE disables the setting from any
1539
     `--build-id' options earlier on the command line.
1540
 
1541
2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
1542
-----------------------------------------
1543
 
1544
The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
1545
output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
1546
executable.  You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
1547
option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
1548
files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
1549
file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
1550
ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
1551
 
1552
   In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
1553
support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
1554
PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values
1555
by either a space or an equals sign.
1556
 
1557
`--add-stdcall-alias'
1558
     If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
1559
     as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
1560
     to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1561
 
1562
`--base-file FILE'
1563
     Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
1564
     of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
1565
     [This is an i386 PE specific option]
1566
 
1567
`--dll'
1568
     Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
1569
     `-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file.  [This
1570
     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1571
 
1572
`--enable-stdcall-fixup'
1573
`--disable-stdcall-fixup'
1574
     If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
1575
     to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
1576
     differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
1577
     and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For
1578
     example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
1579
     function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
1580
     linked to the function `_bar'.  When the linker does this, it
1581
     prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
1582
     but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
1583
     need this feature to be usable.  If you specify
1584
     `--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
1585
     warnings are not printed.  If you specify
1586
     `--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
1587
     mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
1588
     to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1589
 
1590
`--export-all-symbols'
1591
     If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
1592
     will be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if
1593
     there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
1594
     explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
1595
     function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
1596
     unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
1597
     `DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
1598
     not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
1599
     DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
1600
     DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
1601
     ending with `_iname'.  In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
1602
     `libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported.  Symbols
1603
     whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
1604
     exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive
1605
     list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
1606
     this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
1607
     cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
1608
     `_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
1609
     `_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
1610
     `cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
1611
     `environ'.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
1612
     of the linker]
1613
 
1614
`--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
1615
     Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
1616
     exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
1617
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1618
     linker]
1619
 
1620
`--file-alignment'
1621
     Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always
1622
     begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This
1623
     defaults to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
1624
     port of the linker]
1625
 
1626
`--heap RESERVE'
1627
`--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
1628
     Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
1629
     commit) to be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb
1630
     reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1631
     targeted port of the linker]
1632
 
1633
`--image-base VALUE'
1634
     Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
1635
     lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
1636
     is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
1637
     of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
1638
     overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
1639
     and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1640
     targeted port of the linker]
1641
 
1642
`--kill-at'
1643
     If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
1644
     before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1645
     targeted port of the linker]
1646
 
1647
`--large-address-aware'
1648
     If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of
1649
     the COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
1650
     virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used
1651
     in conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
1652
     the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise,
1653
     this bit has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted
1654
     ports of the linker]
1655
 
1656
`--major-image-version VALUE'
1657
     Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1.
1658
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1659
     linker]
1660
 
1661
`--major-os-version VALUE'
1662
     Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4.  [This
1663
     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1664
 
1665
`--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
1666
     Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4.
1667
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1668
     linker]
1669
 
1670
`--minor-image-version VALUE'
1671
     Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0.
1672
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1673
     linker]
1674
 
1675
`--minor-os-version VALUE'
1676
     Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0.  [This
1677
     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1678
 
1679
`--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
1680
     Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0.
1681
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1682
     linker]
1683
 
1684
`--output-def FILE'
1685
     The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
1686
     corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
1687
     (which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
1688
     library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
1689
     automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
1690
     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1691
 
1692
`--out-implib FILE'
1693
     The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
1694
     lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
1695
     lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
1696
     clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
1697
     possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
1698
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1699
     linker]
1700
 
1701
`--enable-auto-image-base'
1702
     Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
1703
     specified using the `--image-base' argument.  By using a hash
1704
     generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
1705
     DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
1706
     execution are avoided.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1707
     targeted port of the linker]
1708
 
1709
`--disable-auto-image-base'
1710
     Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
1711
     user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
1712
     default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
1713
     the linker]
1714
 
1715
`--dll-search-prefix STRING'
1716
     When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
1717
     search for `.dll' in preference to
1718
     `lib.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
1719
     between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
1720
     uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
1721
     `--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.  [This option is specific to the i386
1722
     PE targeted port of the linker]
1723
 
1724
`--enable-auto-import'
1725
     Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
1726
     imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
1727
     building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
1728
     of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
1729
     image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
1730
     PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
1731
 
1732
     Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
1733
     data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
1734
     placed into the .data section instead.  This is in order to work
1735
     around a problem with consts that is described here:
1736
     http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
1737
 
1738
     Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
1739
     may see this message:
1740
 
1741
     "variable '' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
1742
     documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
1743
 
1744
     This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
1745
     ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
1746
     only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
1747
     to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
1748
     as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
1749
     DLL.  Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
1750
     trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
1751
     data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
1752
     detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
1753
 
1754
     There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
1755
     the data type of the exported variable:
1756
 
1757
     One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
1758
     the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
1759
     environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
1760
     supports this feature.
1761
 
1762
     A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
1763
     variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
1764
     For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
1765
     array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
1766
     variable.  Thus:
1767
 
1768
          extern type extern_array[];
1769
          extern_array[1] -->
1770
             { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
1771
 
1772
     or
1773
 
1774
          extern type extern_array[];
1775
          extern_array[1] -->
1776
             { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
1777
 
1778
     For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
1779
     is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
1780
     variable:
1781
 
1782
          extern struct s extern_struct;
1783
          extern_struct.field -->
1784
             { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
1785
 
1786
     or
1787
 
1788
          extern long long extern_ll;
1789
          extern_ll -->
1790
            { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
1791
 
1792
     A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
1793
     'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
1794
     `__declspec(dllimport)'.  However, in practise that requires using
1795
     compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
1796
     building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
1797
     building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
1798
     between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
1799
     constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
1800
     usage:
1801
 
1802
     Original:
1803
          --foo.h
1804
          extern int arr[];
1805
          --foo.c
1806
          #include "foo.h"
1807
          void main(int argc, char **argv){
1808
            printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
1809
          }
1810
 
1811
     Solution 1:
1812
          --foo.h
1813
          extern int arr[];
1814
          --foo.c
1815
          #include "foo.h"
1816
          void main(int argc, char **argv){
1817
            /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
1818
            volatile int *parr = arr;
1819
            printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
1820
          }
1821
 
1822
     Solution 2:
1823
          --foo.h
1824
          /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
1825
          #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
1826
            !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
1827
          #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
1828
          #else
1829
          #define FOO_IMPORT
1830
          #endif
1831
          extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
1832
          --foo.c
1833
          #include "foo.h"
1834
          void main(int argc, char **argv){
1835
            printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
1836
          }
1837
 
1838
     A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
1839
     use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
1840
     offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
1841
     functions).  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
1842
     of the linker]
1843
 
1844
`--disable-auto-import'
1845
     Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
1846
     `__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
1847
     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1848
 
1849
`--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
1850
     If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
1851
     section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
1852
     switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
1853
     can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
1854
     data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1855
     targeted port of the linker]
1856
 
1857
`--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
1858
     Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
1859
     from DLLs.  This is the default.  [This option is specific to the
1860
     i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1861
 
1862
`--enable-extra-pe-debug'
1863
     Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
1864
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1865
     linker]
1866
 
1867
`--section-alignment'
1868
     Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
1869
     at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
1870
     0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
1871
     the linker]
1872
 
1873
`--stack RESERVE'
1874
`--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
1875
     Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
1876
     commit) to be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb
1877
     reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1878
     targeted port of the linker]
1879
 
1880
`--subsystem WHICH'
1881
`--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
1882
`--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
1883
     Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
1884
     legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
1885
     `posix', and `xbox'.  You may optionally set the subsystem version
1886
     also.  Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option
1887
     is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1888
 
1889
 
1890
2.1.2 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
1891
------------------------------------------------------------
1892
 
1893
The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
1894
memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
1895
 
1896
`--no-trampoline'
1897
     This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a
1898
     trampoline is generated for each far function which is called
1899
     using a `jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far
1900
     function is taken).
1901
 
1902
`--bank-window NAME'
1903
     This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
1904
     in the `MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
1905
     window.  The definition of such region is then used by the linker
1906
     to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
1907
 
1908
 
1909
2.1.3 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
1910
---------------------------------------------
1911
 
1912
The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
1913
generation when linking for 68K targets.
1914
 
1915
`--got=TYPE'
1916
     This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
1917
     TYPE should be one of `single', `negative', `multigot' or
1918
     `target'.  For more information refer to the Info entry for `ld'.
1919
 
1920
 
1921

1922
File: ld.info,  Node: Environment,  Prev: Options,  Up: Invocation
1923
 
1924
2.2 Environment Variables
1925
=========================
1926
 
1927
You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
1928
`GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
1929
 
1930
   `GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
1931
`-b' (or its synonym `--format').  Its value should be one of the BFD
1932
names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
1933
the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
1934
`GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
1935
format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
1936
there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
1937
that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
1938
However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
1939
conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
1940
ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
1941
 
1942
   `LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
1943
`-m' option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
1944
behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
1945
available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.  If the `-m'
1946
option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
1947
defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
1948
configured.
1949
 
1950
   Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
1951
`COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
1952
to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a
1953
similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program.  The default may
1954
be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
1955
 
1956

1957
File: ld.info,  Node: Scripts,  Next: Machine Dependent,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top
1958
 
1959
3 Linker Scripts
1960
****************
1961
 
1962
Every link is controlled by a "linker script".  This script is written
1963
in the linker command language.
1964
 
1965
   The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
1966
sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
1967
to control the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts
1968
do nothing more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script
1969
can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
1970
commands described below.
1971
 
1972
   The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
1973
yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
1974
linker executable.  You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
1975
display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, such
1976
as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
1977
 
1978
   You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
1979
option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
1980
linker script.
1981
 
1982
   You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
1983
files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
1984
Implicit Linker Scripts::.
1985
 
1986
* Menu:
1987
 
1988
* Basic Script Concepts::       Basic Linker Script Concepts
1989
* Script Format::               Linker Script Format
1990
* Simple Example::              Simple Linker Script Example
1991
* Simple Commands::             Simple Linker Script Commands
1992
* Assignments::                 Assigning Values to Symbols
1993
* SECTIONS::                    SECTIONS Command
1994
* MEMORY::                      MEMORY Command
1995
* PHDRS::                       PHDRS Command
1996
* VERSION::                     VERSION Command
1997
* Expressions::                 Expressions in Linker Scripts
1998
* Implicit Linker Scripts::     Implicit Linker Scripts
1999
 
2000

2001
File: ld.info,  Node: Basic Script Concepts,  Next: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
2002
 
2003
3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
2004
================================
2005
 
2006
We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2007
describe the linker script language.
2008
 
2009
   The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
2010
output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2011
"object file format".  Each file is called an "object file".  The
2012
output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
2013
will also call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other
2014
things, a list of "sections".  We sometimes refer to a section in an
2015
input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
2016
file is an "output section".
2017
 
2018
   Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
2019
also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
2020
A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
2021
should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
2022
with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
2023
memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
2024
there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
2025
is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
2026
debugging information.
2027
 
2028
   Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
2029
first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
2030
section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
2031
"LMA", or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
2032
section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
2033
same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2034
is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2035
(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2036
based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2037
RAM address would be the VMA.
2038
 
2039
   You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
2040
program with the `-h' option.
2041
 
2042
   Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
2043
table".  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
2044
and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If
2045
you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
2046
defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
2047
variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
2048
referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2049
 
2050
   You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
2051
or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
2052
 
2053

2054
File: ld.info,  Node: Script Format,  Next: Simple Example,  Prev: Basic Script Concepts,  Up: Scripts
2055
 
2056
3.2 Linker Script Format
2057
========================
2058
 
2059
Linker scripts are text files.
2060
 
2061
   You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
2062
either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2063
symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
2064
generally ignored.
2065
 
2066
   Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
2067
directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
2068
would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
2069
in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2070
file name.
2071
 
2072
   You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2073
`/*' and `*/'.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
2074
whitespace.
2075
 
2076

2077
File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Example,  Next: Simple Commands,  Prev: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
2078
 
2079
3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
2080
================================
2081
 
2082
Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2083
 
2084
   The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2085
`SECTIONS'.  You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
2086
layout of the output file.
2087
 
2088
   The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
2089
a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of code,
2090
initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
2091
`.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively.  Let's assume
2092
further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
2093
files.
2094
 
2095
   For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2096
0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
2097
linker script which will do that:
2098
     SECTIONS
2099
     {
2100
       . = 0x10000;
2101
       .text : { *(.text) }
2102
       . = 0x8000000;
2103
       .data : { *(.data) }
2104
       .bss : { *(.bss) }
2105
     }
2106
 
2107
   You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
2108
by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
2109
enclosed in curly braces.
2110
 
2111
   The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
2112
sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
2113
counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2114
other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2115
current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
2116
incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
2117
`SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
2118
 
2119
   The second line defines an output section, `.text'.  The colon is
2120
required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
2121
after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2122
which should be placed into this output section.  The `*' is a wildcard
2123
which matches any file name.  The expression `*(.text)' means all
2124
`.text' input sections in all input files.
2125
 
2126
   Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
2127
`.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
2128
section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
2129
 
2130
   The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
2131
output file.  The linker will place the `.data' output section at
2132
address `0x8000000'.  After the linker places the `.data' output
2133
section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
2134
size of the `.data' output section.  The effect is that the linker will
2135
place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
2136
section in memory.
2137
 
2138
   The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2139
alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
2140
example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
2141
will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
2142
have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
2143
 
2144
   That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
2145
 
2146

2147
File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Commands,  Next: Assignments,  Prev: Simple Example,  Up: Scripts
2148
 
2149
3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
2150
=================================
2151
 
2152
In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2153
 
2154
* Menu:
2155
 
2156
* Entry Point::                 Setting the entry point
2157
* File Commands::               Commands dealing with files
2158
 
2159
* Format Commands::             Commands dealing with object file formats
2160
 
2161
* Miscellaneous Commands::      Other linker script commands
2162
 
2163

2164
File: ld.info,  Node: Entry Point,  Next: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
2165
 
2166
3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
2167
-----------------------------
2168
 
2169
The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
2170
point".  You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
2171
point.  The argument is a symbol name:
2172
     ENTRY(SYMBOL)
2173
 
2174
   There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
2175
the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2176
stopping when one of them succeeds:
2177
   * the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
2178
 
2179
   * the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
2180
 
2181
   * the value of the symbol `start', if defined;
2182
 
2183
   * the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
2184
 
2185
   * The address `0'.
2186
 
2187

2188
File: ld.info,  Node: File Commands,  Next: Format Commands,  Prev: Entry Point,  Up: Simple Commands
2189
 
2190
3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
2191
---------------------------------
2192
 
2193
Several linker script commands deal with files.
2194
 
2195
`INCLUDE FILENAME'
2196
     Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will
2197
     be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
2198
     specified with the `-L' option.  You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
2199
     up to 10 levels deep.
2200
 
2201
     You can place `INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in `MEMORY' or
2202
     `SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions.
2203
 
2204
`INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
2205
`INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
2206
     The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
2207
     in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2208
 
2209
     For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
2210
     a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
2211
     line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
2212
 
2213
     In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
2214
     linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
2215
     option.
2216
 
2217
     In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
2218
     with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
2219
     inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
2220
     the "sysroot prefix".  Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
2221
     file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the linker
2222
     will search through the archive library search path.  See the
2223
     description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
2224
 
2225
     If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
2226
     `libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
2227
 
2228
     When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
2229
     files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2230
     script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
2231
 
2232
`GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
2233
`GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
2234
     The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
2235
     should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2236
     new undefined references are created.  See the description of `-('
2237
     in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
2238
 
2239
`AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
2240
`AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
2241
     This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
2242
     commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
2243
     as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
2244
     with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2245
     when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
2246
     `--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
2247
     restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
2248
     afterwards.
2249
 
2250
`OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
2251
     The `OUTPUT' command names the output file.  Using
2252
     `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
2253
     FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
2254
     Options.).  If both are used, the command line option takes
2255
     precedence.
2256
 
2257
     You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
2258
     output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
2259
 
2260
`SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
2261
     The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
2262
     looks for archive libraries.  Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
2263
     like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
2264
     Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
2265
     both paths.  Paths specified using the command line option are
2266
     searched first.
2267
 
2268
`STARTUP(FILENAME)'
2269
     The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
2270
     that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
2271
     though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be
2272
     useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
2273
     start of the first file.
2274
 
2275

2276
File: ld.info,  Node: Format Commands,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
2277
 
2278
3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
2279
-----------------------------------------------
2280
 
2281
A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2282
 
2283
`OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
2284
`OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
2285
     The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
2286
     output file (*note BFD::).  Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
2287
     exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
2288
     Command Line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
2289
     line option takes precedence.
2290
 
2291
     You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
2292
     formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options.  This
2293
     permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2294
     desired endianness.
2295
 
2296
     If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
2297
     be the first argument, DEFAULT.  If `-EB' is used, the output
2298
     format will be the second argument, BIG.  If `-EL' is used, the
2299
     output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
2300
 
2301
     For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
2302
     uses this command:
2303
          OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2304
     This says that the default format for the output file is
2305
     `elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
2306
     option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
2307
     format.
2308
 
2309
`TARGET(BFDNAME)'
2310
     The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2311
     files.  It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands.  This
2312
     command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
2313
     Command Line Options: Options.).  If the `TARGET' command is used
2314
     but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
2315
     used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.
2316
 
2317

2318
File: ld.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Format Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
2319
 
2320
3.4.4 Other Linker Script Commands
2321
----------------------------------
2322
 
2323
There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2324
 
2325
`ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
2326
     Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
2327
     with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
2328
 
2329
`EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
2330
     Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2331
     symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2332
     modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
2333
     each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times.  This
2334
     command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
2335
 
2336
`FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
2337
     This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
2338
     to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
2339
     output file is specified (`-r').
2340
 
2341
`INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
2342
     This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
2343
     command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
2344
     to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2345
 
2346
`INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION'
2347
     This command is typically used in a script specified by `-T' to
2348
     augment the default `SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays.  It
2349
     inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2350
     OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes `-T' to not override the default
2351
     linker script.  The exact insertion point is as for orphan
2352
     sections.  *Note Location Counter::.  The insertion happens after
2353
     the linker has mapped input sections to output sections.  Prior to
2354
     the insertion, since `-T' scripts are parsed before the default
2355
     linker script, statements in the `-T' script occur before the
2356
     default linker script statements in the internal linker
2357
     representation of the script.  In particular, input section
2358
     assignments will be made to `-T' output sections before those in
2359
     the default script.  Here is an example of how a `-T' script using
2360
     `INSERT' might look:
2361
 
2362
          SECTIONS
2363
          {
2364
            OVERLAY :
2365
            {
2366
              .ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
2367
              .ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
2368
            }
2369
          }
2370
          INSERT AFTER .text;
2371
 
2372
`NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
2373
     This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
2374
     references among certain output sections.
2375
 
2376
     In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
2377
     using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
2378
     section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
2379
     sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
2380
     code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
2381
 
2382
     The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names.  If
2383
     `ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
2384
     an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
2385
     `NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
2386
     names.
2387
 
2388
`OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
2389
     Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
2390
     one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
2391
     see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
2392
     program with the `-f' option.
2393
 
2394

2395
File: ld.info,  Node: Assignments,  Next: SECTIONS,  Prev: Simple Commands,  Up: Scripts
2396
 
2397
3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
2398
===============================
2399
 
2400
You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
2401
the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
2402
 
2403
* Menu:
2404
 
2405
* Simple Assignments::          Simple Assignments
2406
* PROVIDE::                     PROVIDE
2407
* PROVIDE_HIDDEN::              PROVIDE_HIDDEN
2408
* Source Code Reference::       How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
2409
 
2410

2411
File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Assignments,  Next: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
2412
 
2413
3.5.1 Simple Assignments
2414
------------------------
2415
 
2416
You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
2417
 
2418
`SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
2419
`SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
2420
`SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
2421
`SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
2422
`SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
2423
`SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
2424
`SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
2425
`SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
2426
`SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
2427
 
2428
   The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In
2429
the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
2430
adjusted accordingly.
2431
 
2432
   The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter.  You may
2433
only use this within a `SECTIONS' command.  *Note Location Counter::.
2434
 
2435
   The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
2436
 
2437
   Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::.
2438
 
2439
   You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
2440
as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
2441
section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
2442
 
2443
   The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
2444
expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::.
2445
 
2446
   Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
2447
assignments may be used:
2448
 
2449
     floating_point = 0;
2450
     SECTIONS
2451
     {
2452
       .text :
2453
         {
2454
           *(.text)
2455
           _etext = .;
2456
         }
2457
       _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
2458
       .data : { *(.data) }
2459
     }
2460
   In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
2461
zero.  The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
2462
last `.text' input section.  The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
2463
address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
2464
boundary.
2465
 
2466

2467
File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE,  Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Prev: Simple Assignments,  Up: Assignments
2468
 
2469
3.5.2 PROVIDE
2470
-------------
2471
 
2472
In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
2473
only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
2474
the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
2475
However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
2476
function name without encountering an error.  The `PROVIDE' keyword may
2477
be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
2478
but not defined.  The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
2479
 
2480
   Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
2481
     SECTIONS
2482
     {
2483
       .text :
2484
         {
2485
           *(.text)
2486
           _etext = .;
2487
           PROVIDE(etext = .);
2488
         }
2489
     }
2490
 
2491
   In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
2492
underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
2493
the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
2494
underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
2495
If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
2496
will use the definition in the linker script.
2497
 
2498

2499
File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Next: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
2500
 
2501
3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
2502
--------------------
2503
 
2504
Similar to `PROVIDE'.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
2505
hidden and won't be exported.
2506
 
2507

2508
File: ld.info,  Node: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
2509
 
2510
3.5.4 Source Code Reference
2511
---------------------------
2512
 
2513
Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
2514
intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
2515
variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
2516
that does not have a value.
2517
 
2518
   Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
2519
transform names in the source code into different names when they are
2520
stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
2521
prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
2522
mangling'.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
2523
a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
2524
variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
2525
linker script variable might be referred to as:
2526
 
2527
       extern int foo;
2528
 
2529
   But in the linker script it might be defined as:
2530
 
2531
       _foo = 1000;
2532
 
2533
   In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
2534
transformation has taken place.
2535
 
2536
   When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
2537
things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
2538
the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
2539
that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
2540
holds the symbol's _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
2541
of the block of memory holding the symbol's value.  So for example the
2542
following C declaration, at file scope:
2543
 
2544
       int foo = 1000;
2545
 
2546
   creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table.  This entry holds
2547
the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
2548
initially stored.
2549
 
2550
   When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
2551
first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
2552
memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
2553
So:
2554
 
2555
       foo = 1;
2556
 
2557
   looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
2558
associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
2559
address.  Whereas:
2560
 
2561
       int * a = & foo;
2562
 
2563
   looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
2564
then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
2565
variable `a'.
2566
 
2567
   Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
2568
the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
2569
an address without a value.  So for example the linker script
2570
definition:
2571
 
2572
       foo = 1000;
2573
 
2574
   creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
2575
address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
2576
address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
2577
linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
2578
access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
2579
 
2580
   Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
2581
code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
2582
attempt to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the
2583
contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
2584
.FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
2585
 
2586
       start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
2587
       end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
2588
       start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
2589
 
2590
   Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
2591
 
2592
       extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
2593
 
2594
       memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
2595
 
2596
   Note the use of the `&' operators.  These are correct.
2597
 
2598

2599
File: ld.info,  Node: SECTIONS,  Next: MEMORY,  Prev: Assignments,  Up: Scripts
2600
 
2601
3.6 SECTIONS Command
2602
====================
2603
 
2604
The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
2605
output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
2606
 
2607
   The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
2608
     SECTIONS
2609
     {
2610
       SECTIONS-COMMAND
2611
       SECTIONS-COMMAND
2612
       ...
2613
     }
2614
 
2615
   Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
2616
 
2617
   * an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
2618
 
2619
   * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
2620
 
2621
   * an output section description
2622
 
2623
   * an overlay description
2624
 
2625
   The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
2626
`SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
2627
those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
2628
understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
2629
the layout of the output file.
2630
 
2631
   Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
2632
below.
2633
 
2634
   If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
2635
linker will place each input section into an identically named output
2636
section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
2637
input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
2638
example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
2639
in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
2640
 
2641
* Menu:
2642
 
2643
* Output Section Description::  Output section description
2644
* Output Section Name::         Output section name
2645
* Output Section Address::      Output section address
2646
* Input Section::               Input section description
2647
* Output Section Data::         Output section data
2648
* Output Section Keywords::     Output section keywords
2649
* Output Section Discarding::   Output section discarding
2650
* Output Section Attributes::   Output section attributes
2651
* Overlay Description::         Overlay description
2652
 
2653

2654
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Description,  Next: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
2655
 
2656
3.6.1 Output Section Description
2657
--------------------------------
2658
 
2659
The full description of an output section looks like this:
2660
     SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
2661
       [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
2662
       {
2663
         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
2664
         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
2665
         ...
2666
       } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
2667
 
2668
   Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
2669
attributes.
2670
 
2671
   The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
2672
is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
2673
line breaks and other white space are optional.
2674
 
2675
   Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
2676
 
2677
   * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
2678
 
2679
   * an input section description (*note Input Section::)
2680
 
2681
   * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
2682
 
2683
   * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
2684
 
2685

2686
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Name,  Next: Output Section Address,  Prev: Output Section Description,  Up: SECTIONS
2687
 
2688
3.6.2 Output Section Name
2689
-------------------------
2690
 
2691
The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
2692
constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
2693
limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
2694
the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
2695
`.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
2696
of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
2697
the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
2698
may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
2699
any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
2700
 
2701
   The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section
2702
Discarding::.
2703
 
2704

2705
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Address,  Next: Input Section,  Prev: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
2706
 
2707
3.6.3 Output Section Address
2708
----------------------------
2709
 
2710
The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
2711
of the output section.  If you do not provide ADDRESS, the linker will
2712
set it based on REGION if present, or otherwise based on the current
2713
value of the location counter.
2714
 
2715
   If you provide ADDRESS, the address of the output section will be
2716
set to precisely that.  If you provide neither ADDRESS nor REGION, then
2717
the address of the output section will be set to the current value of
2718
the location counter aligned to the alignment requirements of the
2719
output section.  The alignment requirement of the output section is the
2720
strictest alignment of any input section contained within the output
2721
section.
2722
 
2723
   For example,
2724
     .text . : { *(.text) }
2725
   and
2726
     .text : { *(.text) }
2727
   are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the `.text'
2728
output section to the current value of the location counter.  The
2729
second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
2730
to the strictest alignment of a `.text' input section.
2731
 
2732
   The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::.
2733
For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
2734
so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
2735
do something like this:
2736
     .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
2737
   This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
2738
aligned upward to the specified value.
2739
 
2740
   Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
2741
location counter.
2742
 
2743

2744
File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section,  Next: Output Section Data,  Prev: Output Section Address,  Up: SECTIONS
2745
 
2746
3.6.4 Input Section Description
2747
-------------------------------
2748
 
2749
The most common output section command is an input section description.
2750
 
2751
   The input section description is the most basic linker script
2752
operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
2753
your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
2754
linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
2755
 
2756
* Menu:
2757
 
2758
* Input Section Basics::        Input section basics
2759
* Input Section Wildcards::     Input section wildcard patterns
2760
* Input Section Common::        Input section for common symbols
2761
* Input Section Keep::          Input section and garbage collection
2762
* Input Section Example::       Input section example
2763
 
2764

2765
File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Basics,  Next: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
2766
 
2767
3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
2768
............................
2769
 
2770
An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
2771
by a list of section names in parentheses.
2772
 
2773
   The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
2774
describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
2775
 
2776
   The most common input section description is to include all input
2777
sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
2778
include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
2779
     *(.text)
2780
   Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude
2781
a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
2782
be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
2783
EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For example:
2784
     *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
2785
   will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
2786
`otherfile.o' to be included.
2787
 
2788
   There are two ways to include more than one section:
2789
     *(.text .rdata)
2790
     *(.text) *(.rdata)
2791
   The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
2792
`.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
2793
first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
2794
they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all `.text'
2795
input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
2796
sections.
2797
 
2798
   You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
2799
file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
2800
data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
2801
     data.o(.data)
2802
 
2803
   You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
2804
matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
2805
no whitespace around the colon.
2806
 
2807
`archive:file'
2808
     matches file within archive
2809
 
2810
`archive:'
2811
     matches the whole archive
2812
 
2813
`:file'
2814
     matches file but not one in an archive
2815
 
2816
   Either one or both of `archive' and `file' can contain shell
2817
wildcards.  On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
2818
single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so `c:myfile.o'
2819
is a simple file specification, not `myfile.o' within an archive called
2820
`c'.  `archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an
2821
`EXCLUDE_FILE' list, but may not appear in other linker script
2822
contexts.  For instance, you cannot extract a file from an archive by
2823
using `archive:file' in an `INPUT' command.
2824
 
2825
   If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
2826
in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
2827
commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
2828
     data.o
2829
 
2830
   When you use a file name which is not an `archive:file' specifier
2831
and does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first
2832
see if you also specified the file name on the linker command line or
2833
in an `INPUT' command.  If you did not, the linker will attempt to open
2834
the file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line.
2835
Note that this differs from an `INPUT' command, because the linker will
2836
not search for the file in the archive search path.
2837
 
2838

2839
File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Wildcards,  Next: Input Section Common,  Prev: Input Section Basics,  Up: Input Section
2840
 
2841
3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
2842
.......................................
2843
 
2844
In an input section description, either the file name or the section
2845
name or both may be wildcard patterns.
2846
 
2847
   The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
2848
pattern for the file name.
2849
 
2850
   The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
2851
 
2852
`*'
2853
     matches any number of characters
2854
 
2855
`?'
2856
     matches any single character
2857
 
2858
`[CHARS]'
2859
     matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
2860
     may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
2861
     match any lower case letter
2862
 
2863
`\'
2864
     quotes the following character
2865
 
2866
   When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
2867
will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
2868
Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
2869
it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
2870
In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
2871
 
2872
   File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
2873
specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command.  The linker
2874
does not search directories to expand wildcards.
2875
 
2876
   If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
2877
name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
2878
linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
2879
sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
2880
`data.o' rule will not be used:
2881
     .data : { *(.data) }
2882
     .data1 : { data.o(.data) }
2883
 
2884
   Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
2885
wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
2886
change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
2887
wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)').  When
2888
the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
2889
sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
2890
file.
2891
 
2892
   `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
2893
difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
2894
order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
2895
 
2896
   `SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
2897
 
2898
   When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
2899
there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
2900
 
2901
  1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
2902
     It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
2903
     if 2 sections have the same name.
2904
 
2905
  2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
2906
     It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
2907
     if 2 sections have the same alignment.
2908
 
2909
  3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
2910
     treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
2911
 
2912
  4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
2913
     pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
2914
     section pattern).
2915
 
2916
  5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
2917
 
2918
   When both command line section sorting option and linker script
2919
section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
2920
precedence over the command line option.
2921
 
2922
   If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
2923
command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
2924
as nested sorting command.
2925
 
2926
  1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
2927
     alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
2928
     (wildcard section pattern)).
2929
 
2930
  2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
2931
     `--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
2932
     (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
2933
 
2934
   If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
2935
command line option will be ignored.
2936
 
2937
   If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
2938
the `-M' linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
2939
precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
2940
 
2941
   This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
2942
files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
2943
sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'.  The linker will
2944
place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
2945
character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
2946
`.data' section in `.data'.
2947
     SECTIONS {
2948
       .text : { *(.text) }
2949
       .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
2950
       .data : { *(.data) }
2951
       .bss : { *(.bss) }
2952
     }
2953
 
2954

2955
File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Common,  Next: Input Section Keep,  Prev: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
2956
 
2957
3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
2958
........................................
2959
 
2960
A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
2961
file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
2962
linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
2963
named `COMMON'.
2964
 
2965
   You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
2966
other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
2967
particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
2968
input files are placed in another section.
2969
 
2970
   In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
2971
`.bss' section in the output file.  For example:
2972
     .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
2973
 
2974
   Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
2975
For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
2976
common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
2977
use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
2978
In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
2979
symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols.  This permits you to
2980
map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
2981
locations.
2982
 
2983
   You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts.  This
2984
notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
2985
 
2986

2987
File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Keep,  Next: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Common,  Up: Input Section
2988
 
2989
3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
2990
............................................
2991
 
2992
When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
2993
often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
2994
accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
2995
`KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
2996
 
2997

2998
File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Keep,  Up: Input Section
2999
 
3000
3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
3001
.............................
3002
 
3003
The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
3004
to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
3005
start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
3006
All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
3007
same output section.  All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
3008
output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
3009
All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
3010
are written to output section `outputc'.
3011
 
3012
     SECTIONS {
3013
       outputa 0x10000 :
3014
         {
3015
         all.o
3016
         foo.o (.input1)
3017
         }
3018
       outputb :
3019
         {
3020
         foo.o (.input2)
3021
         foo1.o (.input1)
3022
         }
3023
       outputc :
3024
         {
3025
         *(.input1)
3026
         *(.input2)
3027
         }
3028
     }
3029
 
3030

3031
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Data,  Next: Output Section Keywords,  Prev: Input Section,  Up: SECTIONS
3032
 
3033
3.6.5 Output Section Data
3034
-------------------------
3035
 
3036
You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3037
`BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
3038
command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
3039
providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
3040
expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
3041
 
3042
   The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
3043
four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
3044
location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
3045
 
3046
   For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
3047
value of the symbol `addr':
3048
     BYTE(1)
3049
     LONG(addr)
3050
 
3051
   When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
3052
they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
3053
are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case `QUAD'
3054
stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
3055
bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3056
 
3057
   If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
3058
endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
3059
endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
3060
endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
3061
stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
3062
 
3063
   Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
3064
between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3065
     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
3066
   whereas this will work:
3067
     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
3068
 
3069
   You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
3070
current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
3071
otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3072
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
3073
with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A `FILL'
3074
statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
3075
the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
3076
you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
3077
section.
3078
 
3079
   This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
3080
value `0x90':
3081
     FILL(0x90909090)
3082
 
3083
   The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
3084
attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
3085
`FILL' command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
3086
`FILL' command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
3087
details on the fill expression.
3088
 
3089

3090
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Keywords,  Next: Output Section Discarding,  Prev: Output Section Data,  Up: SECTIONS
3091
 
3092
3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
3093
-----------------------------
3094
 
3095
There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3096
commands.
3097
 
3098
`CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
3099
     The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
3100
     file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
3101
     corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
3102
     output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
3103
     appears.
3104
 
3105
     This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
3106
     normally used for any other object file format.
3107
 
3108
`CONSTRUCTORS'
3109
     When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3110
     unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3111
     destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
3112
     arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3113
     automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
3114
     name.  For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
3115
     tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
3116
     section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears.  The
3117
     `CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
3118
 
3119
     The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
3120
     constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
3121
     Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
3122
     end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
3123
     number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
3124
     destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
3125
     actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
3126
     normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
3127
     `__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
3128
     `main'.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
3129
     `atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
3130
 
3131
     For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
3132
     arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
3133
     addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
3134
     and `.dtors' sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
3135
     linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
3136
     runtime code expects to see.
3137
 
3138
                __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3139
                LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3140
                *(.ctors)
3141
                LONG(0)
3142
                __CTOR_END__ = .;
3143
                __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3144
                LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3145
                *(.dtors)
3146
                LONG(0)
3147
                __DTOR_END__ = .;
3148
 
3149
     If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
3150
     which provides some control over the order in which global
3151
     constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
3152
     to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
3153
     the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
3154
     instead.  When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
3155
     `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
3156
     just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
3157
 
3158
     Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
3159
     automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
3160
     them.  However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
3161
     and writing your own linker scripts.
3162
 
3163
 
3164

3165
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Discarding,  Next: Output Section Attributes,  Prev: Output Section Keywords,  Up: SECTIONS
3166
 
3167
3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
3168
-------------------------------
3169
 
3170
The linker will not create output sections with no contents.  This is
3171
for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be
3172
present in any of the input files.  For example:
3173
     .foo : { *(.foo) }
3174
   will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
3175
`.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections
3176
are not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate space in
3177
an output section will also create the output section.
3178
 
3179
   The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
3180
Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
3181
defines symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will
3182
obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3183
section is discarded.
3184
 
3185
   The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
3186
input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3187
section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
3188
 
3189

3190
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Attributes,  Next: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Discarding,  Up: SECTIONS
3191
 
3192
3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
3193
-------------------------------
3194
 
3195
We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3196
like this:
3197
     SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
3198
       [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
3199
       {
3200
         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3201
         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3202
         ...
3203
       } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
3204
We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
3205
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.  In this section we will describe the remaining
3206
section attributes.
3207
 
3208
* Menu:
3209
 
3210
* Output Section Type::         Output section type
3211
* Output Section LMA::          Output section LMA
3212
* Forced Output Alignment::     Forced Output Alignment
3213
* Forced Input Alignment::      Forced Input Alignment
3214
* Output Section Region::       Output section region
3215
* Output Section Phdr::         Output section phdr
3216
* Output Section Fill::         Output section fill
3217
 
3218

3219
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Type,  Next: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3220
 
3221
3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
3222
...........................
3223
 
3224
Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
3225
parentheses.  The following types are defined:
3226
 
3227
`NOLOAD'
3228
     The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
3229
     be loaded into memory when the program is run.
3230
 
3231
`DSECT'
3232
`COPY'
3233
`INFO'
3234
`OVERLAY'
3235
     These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3236
     rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
3237
     marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3238
     section when the program is run.
3239
 
3240
   The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3241
the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
3242
the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
3243
section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
3244
loaded when the program is run.  The contents of the `ROM' section will
3245
appear in the linker output file as usual.
3246
     SECTIONS {
3247
       ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
3248
       ...
3249
     }
3250
 
3251

3252
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section LMA,  Next: Forced Output Alignment,  Prev: Output Section Type,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3253
 
3254
3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
3255
..........................
3256
 
3257
Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
3258
*Note Basic Script Concepts::.  The address expression which may appear
3259
in an output section description sets the VMA (*note Output Section
3260
Address::).
3261
 
3262
   The expression LMA that follows the `AT' keyword specifies the load
3263
address of the section.
3264
 
3265
   Alternatively, with `AT>LMA_REGION' expression, you may specify a
3266
memory region for the section's load address. *Note MEMORY::.  Note
3267
that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the linker
3268
will use the LMA_REGION as the VMA region as well.
3269
 
3270
   If neither `AT' nor `AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
3271
the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between VMA and
3272
LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output section in the
3273
same region.  If there is no preceding output section or the section is
3274
not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal to the VMA.  *Note
3275
Output Section Region::.
3276
 
3277
   This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
3278
example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
3279
called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
3280
loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
3281
`0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
3282
`0x3000'.  The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
3283
shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
3284
 
3285
     SECTIONS
3286
       {
3287
       .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
3288
       .mdata 0x2000 :
3289
         AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
3290
         { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
3291
       .bss 0x3000 :
3292
         { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
3293
     }
3294
 
3295
   The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
3296
with this linker script would include something like the following, to
3297
copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
3298
Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
3299
linker script.
3300
 
3301
     extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
3302
     char *src = &_etext;
3303
     char *dst = &_data;
3304
 
3305
     /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
3306
     while (dst < &_edata) {
3307
       *dst++ = *src++;
3308
     }
3309
 
3310
     /* Zero bss */
3311
     for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
3312
       *dst = 0;
3313
 
3314

3315
File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Output Alignment,  Next: Forced Input Alignment,  Prev: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3316
 
3317
3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
3318
...............................
3319
 
3320
You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
3321
 
3322

3323
File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Input Alignment,  Next: Output Section Region,  Prev: Forced Output Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3324
 
3325
3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
3326
..............................
3327
 
3328
You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
3329
SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
3330
sections, whether larger or smaller.
3331
 
3332

3333
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Region,  Next: Output Section Phdr,  Prev: Forced Input Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3334
 
3335
3.6.8.5 Output Section Region
3336
.............................
3337
 
3338
You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
3339
using `>REGION'.  *Note MEMORY::.
3340
 
3341
   Here is a simple example:
3342
     MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
3343
     SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
3344
 
3345

3346
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Phdr,  Next: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Region,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3347
 
3348
3.6.8.6 Output Section Phdr
3349
...........................
3350
 
3351
You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
3352
using `:PHDR'.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
3353
segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
3354
those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
3355
You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
3356
segment at all.
3357
 
3358
   Here is a simple example:
3359
     PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
3360
     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
3361
 
3362

3363
File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Phdr,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3364
 
3365
3.6.8.7 Output Section Fill
3366
...........................
3367
 
3368
You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
3369
FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
3370
unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
3371
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
3372
filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression
3373
is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
3374
and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
3375
hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern;  Leading zeros
3376
become part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
3377
parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
3378
significant bytes of the value of the expression.  In all cases, the
3379
number is big-endian.
3380
 
3381
   You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
3382
output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
3383
 
3384
   Here is a simple example:
3385
     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
3386
 
3387

3388
File: ld.info,  Node: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Attributes,  Up: SECTIONS
3389
 
3390
3.6.9 Overlay Description
3391
-------------------------
3392
 
3393
An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
3394
are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
3395
the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
3396
copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
3397
required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
3398
can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
3399
than another.
3400
 
3401
   Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command.  The `OVERLAY'
3402
command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
3403
description.  The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
3404
     OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
3405
       {
3406
         SECNAME1
3407
           {
3408
             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3409
             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3410
             ...
3411
           } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
3412
         SECNAME2
3413
           {
3414
             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3415
             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3416
             ...
3417
           } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
3418
         ...
3419
       } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
3420
 
3421
   Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
3422
section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section
3423
definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
3424
within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
3425
no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
3426
an `OVERLAY'.
3427
 
3428
   The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
3429
load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
3430
consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
3431
`OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
3432
address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
3433
address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
3434
location counter).
3435
 
3436
   If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
3437
the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections all
3438
run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
3439
section to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
3440
Commands.
3441
 
3442
   For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
3443
provides two symbols.  The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
3444
the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
3445
`__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
3446
section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
3447
identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
3448
to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
3449
 
3450
   At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
3451
to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
3452
section.
3453
 
3454
   Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
3455
`SECTIONS' construct.
3456
       OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
3457
        {
3458
          .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
3459
          .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
3460
        }
3461
This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address
3462
0x1000.  `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will
3463
be loaded immediately after `.text0'.  The following symbols will be
3464
defined if referenced: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
3465
`__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
3466
 
3467
   C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
3468
like the following.
3469
 
3470
       extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
3471
       memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
3472
               &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
3473
 
3474
   Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
3475
everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
3476
example could have been written identically as follows.
3477
 
3478
       .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
3479
       PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
3480
       PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
3481
       .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
3482
       PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
3483
       PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
3484
       . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
3485
 
3486

3487
File: ld.info,  Node: MEMORY,  Next: PHDRS,  Prev: SECTIONS,  Up: Scripts
3488
 
3489
3.7 MEMORY Command
3490
==================
3491
 
3492
The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
3493
memory.  You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
3494
 
3495
   The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
3496
memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
3497
may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
3498
can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
3499
set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
3500
regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
3501
around to fit into the available regions.
3502
 
3503
   A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
3504
However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you
3505
wish.  The syntax is:
3506
     MEMORY
3507
       {
3508
         NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
3509
         ...
3510
       }
3511
 
3512
   The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
3513
The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
3514
names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
3515
symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
3516
have a distinct name.
3517
 
3518
   The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
3519
whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
3520
not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *Note
3521
SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
3522
section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
3523
the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
3524
them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
3525
 
3526
   The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
3527
`R'
3528
     Read-only section
3529
 
3530
`W'
3531
     Read/write section
3532
 
3533
`X'
3534
     Executable section
3535
 
3536
`A'
3537
     Allocatable section
3538
 
3539
`I'
3540
     Initialized section
3541
 
3542
`L'
3543
     Same as `I'
3544
 
3545
`!'
3546
     Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
3547
 
3548
   If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
3549
`!', it will be placed in the memory region.  The `!' attribute
3550
reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
3551
memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
3552
 
3553
   The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
3554
memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
3555
cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
3556
`org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
3557
 
3558
   The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
3559
As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
3560
and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword `LENGTH' may be
3561
abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
3562
 
3563
   In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
3564
regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
3565
and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes.  The linker
3566
will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
3567
explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
3568
executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
3569
explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
3570
 
3571
     MEMORY
3572
       {
3573
         rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
3574
         ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
3575
       }
3576
 
3577
   Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
3578
specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
3579
output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
3580
named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
3581
*Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
3582
output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
3583
address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
3584
directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
3585
will issue an error message.
3586
 
3587
   It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
3588
expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
3589
 
3590
       _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3591
 
3592

3593
File: ld.info,  Node: PHDRS,  Next: VERSION,  Prev: MEMORY,  Up: Scripts
3594
 
3595
3.8 PHDRS Command
3596
=================
3597
 
3598
The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
3599
"segments".  The program headers describe how the program should be
3600
loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the `objdump'
3601
program with the `-p' option.
3602
 
3603
   When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
3604
reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
3605
program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
3606
This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
3607
interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
3608
 
3609
   The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
3610
However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
3611
precisely.  You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose.  When the
3612
linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
3613
create any program headers other than the ones specified.
3614
 
3615
   The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
3616
generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
3617
ignore `PHDRS'.
3618
 
3619
   This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command.  The words `PHDRS',
3620
`FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
3621
 
3622
     PHDRS
3623
     {
3624
       NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
3625
             [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
3626
     }
3627
 
3628
   The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
3629
linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
3630
names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
3631
symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
3632
have a distinct name.
3633
 
3634
   Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
3635
system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
3636
specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
3637
sections in the segments.  You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
3638
to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
3639
Phdr::.
3640
 
3641
   It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
3642
merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
3643
repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
3644
section.
3645
 
3646
   If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
3647
the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
3648
specify `:PHDR' in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
3649
generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
3650
segment.  You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
3651
the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
3652
 
3653
   You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords appear after the
3654
program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
3655
The `FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
3656
file header.  The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include
3657
the ELF program headers themselves.
3658
 
3659
   The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
3660
value of the keyword.
3661
 
3662
`PT_NULL' (0)
3663
     Indicates an unused program header.
3664
 
3665
`PT_LOAD' (1)
3666
     Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
3667
     loaded from the file.
3668
 
3669
`PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
3670
     Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
3671
 
3672
`PT_INTERP' (3)
3673
     Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
3674
     be found.
3675
 
3676
`PT_NOTE' (4)
3677
     Indicates a segment holding note information.
3678
 
3679
`PT_SHLIB' (5)
3680
     A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
3681
     ELF ABI.
3682
 
3683
`PT_PHDR' (6)
3684
     Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
3685
 
3686
EXPRESSION
3687
     An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
3688
     may be used for types not defined above.
3689
 
3690
   You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
3691
address in memory by using an `AT' expression.  This is identical to the
3692
`AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
3693
LMA::).  The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
3694
section attribute.
3695
 
3696
   The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
3697
which comprise the segment.  You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
3698
explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
3699
integer.  It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
3700
 
3701
   Here is an example of `PHDRS'.  This shows a typical set of program
3702
headers used on a native ELF system.
3703
 
3704
     PHDRS
3705
     {
3706
       headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
3707
       interp PT_INTERP ;
3708
       text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
3709
       data PT_LOAD ;
3710
       dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
3711
     }
3712
 
3713
     SECTIONS
3714
     {
3715
       . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
3716
       .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
3717
       .text : { *(.text) } :text
3718
       .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
3719
       ...
3720
       . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
3721
       .data : { *(.data) } :data
3722
       .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
3723
       ...
3724
     }
3725
 
3726

3727
File: ld.info,  Node: VERSION,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: PHDRS,  Up: Scripts
3728
 
3729
3.9 VERSION Command
3730
===================
3731
 
3732
The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
3733
only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
3734
symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
3735
a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
3736
shared library.
3737
 
3738
   You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
3739
or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
3740
can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
3741
 
3742
   The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
3743
     VERSION { version-script-commands }
3744
 
3745
   The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
3746
by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
3747
version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
3748
version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
3749
version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
3750
scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
3751
library.
3752
 
3753
   The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
3754
few examples.
3755
 
3756
     VERS_1.1 {
3757
         global:
3758
                 foo1;
3759
         local:
3760
                 old*;
3761
                 original*;
3762
                 new*;
3763
     };
3764
 
3765
     VERS_1.2 {
3766
                 foo2;
3767
     } VERS_1.1;
3768
 
3769
     VERS_2.0 {
3770
                 bar1; bar2;
3771
         extern "C++" {
3772
                 ns::*;
3773
                 "int f(int, double)";
3774
              }
3775
     } VERS_1.2;
3776
 
3777
   This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
3778
version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies.  The
3779
script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'.  It reduces a number of
3780
symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
3781
shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
3782
symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
3783
The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
3784
when matching filenames (also known as "globbing").  However, if you
3785
specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
3786
as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
3787
 
3788
   Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'.  This node depends
3789
upon `VERS_1.1'.  The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
3790
node `VERS_1.2'.
3791
 
3792
   Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'.  This node
3793
depends upon `VERS_1.2'.  The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
3794
`bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
3795
 
3796
   When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
3797
specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
3798
unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
3799
unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
3800
somewhere in the version script.
3801
 
3802
   The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
3803
what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The `2.0' version
3804
could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'.  However,
3805
this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
3806
 
3807
   Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in
3808
the version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
3809
symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
3810
which won't.
3811
 
3812
     { global: foo; bar; local: *; };
3813
 
3814
   When you link an application against a shared library that has
3815
versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
3816
symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
3817
each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
3818
loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
3819
linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
3820
application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
3821
way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
3822
all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
3823
search for each symbol reference.
3824
 
3825
   The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
3826
doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
3827
that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
3828
functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
3829
the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
3830
required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
3831
that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
3832
versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
3833
the libraries being used with the application are too old.
3834
 
3835
   There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
3836
first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
3837
source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
3838
script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
3839
maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
3840
     __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
3841
   in the C source file.  This renames the function `original_foo' to
3842
be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'.  The
3843
`local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
3844
from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
3845
version script.
3846
 
3847
   The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
3848
function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
3849
an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
3850
version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
3851
linked against the old interface to continue to function.
3852
 
3853
   To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
3854
file.  Here is an example:
3855
 
3856
     __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
3857
     __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
3858
     __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@VERS_1.2");
3859
     __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
3860
 
3861
   In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
3862
unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
3863
this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
3864
`old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
3865
 
3866
   When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
3867
be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
3868
this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
3869
type of `.symver' directive.  You can only declare one version of a
3870
symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
3871
have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
3872
 
3873
   If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
3874
within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
3875
(i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
3876
specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
3877
 
3878
   You can also specify the language in the version script:
3879
 
3880
     VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
3881
 
3882
   The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'.  The linker will
3883
iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
3884
according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
3885
`version-script-commands'.
3886
 
3887
   Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
3888
described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
3889
or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
3890
the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
3891
whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
3892
cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
3893
change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
3894
check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
3895
when you upgrade.
3896
 
3897

3898
File: ld.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: VERSION,  Up: Scripts
3899
 
3900
3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
3901
==================================
3902
 
3903
The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
3904
that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
3905
expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
3906
host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
3907
 
3908
   You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
3909
 
3910
   The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
3911
in expressions.
3912
 
3913
* Menu:
3914
 
3915
* Constants::                   Constants
3916
* Symbols::                     Symbol Names
3917
* Orphan Sections::             Orphan Sections
3918
* Location Counter::            The Location Counter
3919
* Operators::                   Operators
3920
* Evaluation::                  Evaluation
3921
* Expression Section::          The Section of an Expression
3922
* Builtin Functions::           Builtin Functions
3923
 
3924

3925
File: ld.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
3926
 
3927
3.10.1 Constants
3928
----------------
3929
 
3930
All constants are integers.
3931
 
3932
   As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
3933
octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
3934
The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
3935
 
3936
   In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
3937
constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively. For example, the
3938
following all refer to the same quantity:
3939
     _fourk_1 = 4K;
3940
     _fourk_2 = 4096;
3941
     _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
3942
 
3943

3944
File: ld.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Orphan Sections,  Prev: Constants,  Up: Expressions
3945
 
3946
3.10.2 Symbol Names
3947
-------------------
3948
 
3949
Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
3950
and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
3951
Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
3952
specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
3953
keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
3954
     "SECTION" = 9;
3955
     "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
3956
 
3957
   Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
3958
safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, `A-B' is one
3959
symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
3960
 
3961

3962
File: ld.info,  Node: Orphan Sections,  Next: Location Counter,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
3963
 
3964
3.10.3 Orphan Sections
3965
----------------------
3966
 
3967
Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
3968
explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The
3969
linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
3970
to guess as to where they should be placed.  The linker uses a simple
3971
heuristic to do this.  It attempts to place orphan sections after
3972
non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
3973
loadable vs non-loadable, etc.  If there is not enough room to do this
3974
then it places at the end of the file.
3975
 
3976
   For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
3977
as well as section flag.
3978
 
3979
   If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
3980
the linker will automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols:
3981
__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
3982
section.  These indicate the start address and end address of the
3983
orphaned section respectively.  Note: most section names are not
3984
representable as C identifiers because they contain a `.' character.
3985
 
3986

3987
File: ld.info,  Node: Location Counter,  Next: Operators,  Prev: Orphan Sections,  Up: Expressions
3988
 
3989
3.10.4 The Location Counter
3990
---------------------------
3991
 
3992
The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
3993
output location counter.  Since the `.' always refers to a location in
3994
an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
3995
`SECTIONS' command.  The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
3996
ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
3997
 
3998
   Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
3999
moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
4000
location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4001
and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing
4002
creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
4003
 
4004
     SECTIONS
4005
     {
4006
       output :
4007
         {
4008
           file1(.text)
4009
           . = . + 1000;
4010
           file2(.text)
4011
           . += 1000;
4012
           file3(.text)
4013
         } = 0x12345678;
4014
     }
4015
   In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
4016
at the beginning of the output section `output'.  It is followed by a
4017
1000 byte gap.  Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
4018
with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
4019
The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
4020
(*note Output Section Fill::).
4021
 
4022
   Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4023
current containing object.  Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
4024
whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
4025
If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
4026
byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
4027
Thus in a script like this:
4028
 
4029
     SECTIONS
4030
     {
4031
         . = 0x100
4032
         .text: {
4033
           *(.text)
4034
           . = 0x200
4035
         }
4036
         . = 0x500
4037
         .data: {
4038
           *(.data)
4039
           . += 0x600
4040
         }
4041
     }
4042
 
4043
   The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
4044
a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
4045
`.text' input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
4046
an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
4047
backwards).  The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
4048
an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
4049
the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
4050
section itself.
4051
 
4052
   Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4053
output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4054
needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
4055
 
4056
     SECTIONS
4057
     {
4058
         start_of_text = . ;
4059
         .text: { *(.text) }
4060
         end_of_text = . ;
4061
 
4062
         start_of_data = . ;
4063
         .data: { *(.data) }
4064
         end_of_data = . ;
4065
     }
4066
 
4067
   If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
4068
mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
4069
`.text' and `.data'.  You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
4070
on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
4071
particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn't
4072
associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
4073
assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
4074
output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
4075
I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
4076
script was written as follows:
4077
 
4078
     SECTIONS
4079
     {
4080
         start_of_text = . ;
4081
         .text: { *(.text) }
4082
         end_of_text = . ;
4083
 
4084
         start_of_data = . ;
4085
         .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
4086
         .data: { *(.data) }
4087
         end_of_data = . ;
4088
     }
4089
 
4090
   This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4091
`start_of_data'.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
4092
to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
4093
assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
4094
section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
4095
write:
4096
 
4097
     SECTIONS
4098
     {
4099
         start_of_text = . ;
4100
         .text: { *(.text) }
4101
         end_of_text = . ;
4102
 
4103
         . = . ;
4104
         start_of_data = . ;
4105
         .data: { *(.data) }
4106
         end_of_data = . ;
4107
     }
4108
 
4109
   Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
4110
`end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
4111
 
4112

4113
File: ld.info,  Node: Operators,  Next: Evaluation,  Prev: Location Counter,  Up: Expressions
4114
 
4115
3.10.5 Operators
4116
----------------
4117
 
4118
The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4119
the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4120
     precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
4121
     (highest)
4122
     1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
4123
     2               left            *  /  %
4124
     3               left            +  -
4125
     4               left            >>  <<
4126
     5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
4127
     6               left            &
4128
     7               left            |
4129
     8               left            &&
4130
     9               left            ||
4131
     10              right           ? :
4132
     11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
4133
     (lowest)
4134
   Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
4135
 
4136

4137
File: ld.info,  Node: Evaluation,  Next: Expression Section,  Prev: Operators,  Up: Expressions
4138
 
4139
3.10.6 Evaluation
4140
-----------------
4141
 
4142
The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
4143
an expression when absolutely necessary.
4144
 
4145
   The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
4146
address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
4147
regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
4148
as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
4149
 
4150
   However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
4151
until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
4152
other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
4153
for use in the symbol assignment expression.
4154
 
4155
   The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
4156
assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
4157
allocation.
4158
 
4159
   Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
4160
`.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
4161
 
4162
   If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
4163
available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
4164
following
4165
     SECTIONS
4166
       {
4167
         .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
4168
           { *(.text) }
4169
       }
4170
will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
4171
address'.
4172
 
4173

4174
File: ld.info,  Node: Expression Section,  Next: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Evaluation,  Up: Expressions
4175
 
4176
3.10.7 The Section of an Expression
4177
-----------------------------------
4178
 
4179
When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
4180
or relative to some section.  A relative expression is expressed as a
4181
fixed offset from the base of a section.
4182
 
4183
   The position of the expression within the linker script determines
4184
whether it is absolute or relative.  An expression which appears within
4185
an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
4186
section.  An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
4187
 
4188
   A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you
4189
request relocatable output using the `-r' option.  That means that a
4190
further link operation may change the value of the symbol.  The symbol's
4191
section will be the section of the relative expression.
4192
 
4193
   A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
4194
through any further link operation.  The symbol will be absolute, and
4195
will not have any particular associated section.
4196
 
4197
   You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
4198
to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
4199
create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
4200
section `.data':
4201
     SECTIONS
4202
       {
4203
         .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
4204
       }
4205
   If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
4206
`.data' section.
4207
 
4208

4209
File: ld.info,  Node: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Expression Section,  Up: Expressions
4210
 
4211
3.10.8 Builtin Functions
4212
------------------------
4213
 
4214
The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
4215
use in linker script expressions.
4216
 
4217
`ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
4218
     Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
4219
     value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
4220
     absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
4221
     symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
4222
     Section::.
4223
 
4224
`ADDR(SECTION)'
4225
     Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your
4226
     script must previously have defined the location of that section.
4227
     In the following example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned
4228
     identical values:
4229
          SECTIONS { ...
4230
            .output1 :
4231
              {
4232
              start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
4233
              ...
4234
              }
4235
            .output :
4236
              {
4237
              symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
4238
              symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
4239
              }
4240
          ... }
4241
 
4242
`ALIGN(ALIGN)'
4243
`ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
4244
     Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
4245
     to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
4246
     change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
4247
     on it.  The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
4248
     be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
4249
     ALIGN)').
4250
 
4251
     Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
4252
     next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
4253
     variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
4254
     input sections:
4255
          SECTIONS { ...
4256
            .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
4257
              *(.data)
4258
              variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
4259
            }
4260
          ... }
4261
     The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the
4262
     location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS
4263
     attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section
4264
     Address::).  The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the
4265
     value of a symbol.
4266
 
4267
     The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
4268
 
4269
`ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
4270
     Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that
4271
     section has been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated
4272
     when this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the
4273
     following example, the alignment of the `.output' section is
4274
     stored as the first value in that section.
4275
          SECTIONS{ ...
4276
            .output {
4277
              LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
4278
              ...
4279
              }
4280
          ... }
4281
 
4282
`BLOCK(EXP)'
4283
     This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
4284
     scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
4285
     output section.
4286
 
4287
`DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
4288
     This is equivalent to either
4289
          (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
4290
     or
4291
          (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
4292
     depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
4293
     pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
4294
     expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not.  If the
4295
     latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
4296
     memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
4297
     bytes in the on-disk file.
4298
 
4299
     This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
4300
     not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
4301
     script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
4302
     should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
4303
     for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
4304
 
4305
     Example:
4306
            . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
4307
 
4308
`DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
4309
     This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
4310
     evaluation purposes.
4311
 
4312
            . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
4313
 
4314
`DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
4315
     This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
4316
     option is used.  Second argument is returned.  When `-z relro'
4317
     option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
4318
     otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
4319
     aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
4320
     target.  If present in the linker script, it must always come in
4321
     between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
4322
 
4323
            . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
4324
 
4325
`DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
4326
     Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
4327
     defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
4328
     return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
4329
     symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
4330
     set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
4331
     section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
4332
     is preserved:
4333
 
4334
          SECTIONS { ...
4335
            .text : {
4336
              begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
4337
              ...
4338
            }
4339
            ...
4340
          }
4341
 
4342
`LENGTH(MEMORY)'
4343
     Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
4344
 
4345
`LOADADDR(SECTION)'
4346
     Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  This is normally
4347
     the same as `ADDR', but it may be different if the `AT' attribute
4348
     is used in the output section definition (*note Output Section
4349
     LMA::).
4350
 
4351
`MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
4352
     Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
4353
 
4354
`MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
4355
     Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
4356
 
4357
`NEXT(EXP)'
4358
     Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
4359
     This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
4360
     the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
4361
     file, the two functions are equivalent.
4362
 
4363
`ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
4364
     Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
4365
 
4366
`SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
4367
     Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit
4368
     value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T'
4369
     option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
4370
     DEFAULT.  At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be
4371
     used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
4372
     sections, but you use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
4373
 
4374
`SIZEOF(SECTION)'
4375
     Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
4376
     been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
4377
     evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following
4378
     example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
4379
          SECTIONS{ ...
4380
            .output {
4381
              .start = . ;
4382
              ...
4383
              .end = . ;
4384
              }
4385
            symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
4386
            symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
4387
          ... }
4388
 
4389
`SIZEOF_HEADERS'
4390
`sizeof_headers'
4391
     Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
4392
     information which appears at the start of the output file.  You
4393
     can use this number when setting the start address of the first
4394
     section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
4395
 
4396
     When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
4397
     `SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
4398
     number of program headers before it has determined all the section
4399
     addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
4400
     additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
4401
     room for program headers'.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
4402
     using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
4403
     script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
4404
     headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
4405
     `PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
4406
 
4407

4408
File: ld.info,  Node: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Scripts
4409
 
4410
3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
4411
============================
4412
 
4413
If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
4414
an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
4415
linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
4416
linker will report an error.
4417
 
4418
   An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
4419
 
4420
   Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
4421
assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
4422
 
4423
   Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
4424
read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
4425
script was read.  This can affect archive searching.
4426
 
4427

4428
File: ld.info,  Node: Machine Dependent,  Next: BFD,  Prev: Scripts,  Up: Top
4429
 
4430
4 Machine Dependent Features
4431
****************************
4432
 
4433
`ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
4434
describe them.  Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
4435
not listed.
4436
 
4437
* Menu:
4438
 
4439
 
4440
* H8/300::                      `ld' and the H8/300
4441
 
4442
* i960::                        `ld' and the Intel 960 family
4443
 
4444
* ARM::                         `ld' and the ARM family
4445
 
4446
* HPPA ELF32::                  `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
4447
 
4448
* M68K::                        `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
4449
 
4450
* MMIX::                        `ld' and MMIX
4451
 
4452
* MSP430::                      `ld' and MSP430
4453
 
4454
* M68HC11/68HC12::              `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
4455
 
4456
* PowerPC ELF32::               `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
4457
 
4458
* PowerPC64 ELF64::             `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
4459
 
4460
* SPU ELF::                     `ld' and SPU ELF Support
4461
 
4462
* TI COFF::                     `ld' and TI COFF
4463
 
4464
* WIN32::                       `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
4465
 
4466
* Xtensa::                      `ld' and Xtensa Processors
4467
 
4468

4469
File: ld.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
4470
 
4471
4.1 `ld' and the H8/300
4472
=======================
4473
 
4474
For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
4475
specify the `--relax' command-line option.
4476
 
4477
_relaxing address modes_
4478
     `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
4479
     within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
4480
     relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
4481
 
4482
_synthesizing instructions_
4483
     `ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
4484
     absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
4485
     changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
4486
     linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
4487
     address AA is in the top page of memory).
4488
 
4489
_bit manipulation instructions_
4490
     `ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
4491
     biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
4492
     bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
4493
     to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
4494
     address form.  (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
4495
     into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
4496
     page of memory).
4497
 
4498
_system control instructions_
4499
     `ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
4500
     absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
4501
     changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
4502
     turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
4503
     address AA is in the top page of memory).
4504
 
4505

4506
File: ld.info,  Node: i960,  Next: ARM,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Machine Dependent
4507
 
4508
4.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
4509
=================================
4510
 
4511
You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
4512
the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
4513
specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
4514
instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the linker's search
4515
strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
4516
specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
4517
loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
4518
 
4519
   For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
4520
`-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
4521
any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
4522
 
4523
     try
4524
     libtry.a
4525
     tryca
4526
     libtryca.a
4527
 
4528
The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
4529
two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
4530
 
4531
   You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
4532
the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
4533
each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
4534
specifies a library.
4535
 
4536
   `ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family.  If you
4537
specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
4538
targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
4539
relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively.  `ld' also turns
4540
`cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
4541
target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
4542
not itself call any subroutines).
4543
 
4544

4545
File: ld.info,  Node: M68HC11/68HC12,  Next: PowerPC ELF32,  Prev: MSP430,  Up: Machine Dependent
4546
 
4547
4.3 `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
4548
====================================================
4549
 
4550
4.3.1 Linker Relaxation
4551
-----------------------
4552
 
4553
For the Motorola 68HC11, `ld' can perform these global optimizations
4554
when you specify the `--relax' command-line option.
4555
 
4556
_relaxing address modes_
4557
     `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
4558
     within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
4559
     relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
4560
 
4561
     `ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
4562
     transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
4563
     page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
4564
 
4565
_relaxing gcc instruction group_
4566
     When `gcc' is called with `-mrelax', it can emit group of
4567
     instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
4568
     addressing mode. These instructions consists of `bclr' or `bset'
4569
     instructions.
4570
 
4571
 
4572
4.3.2 Trampoline Generation
4573
---------------------------
4574
 
4575
For 68HC11 and 68HC12, `ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
4576
function using a normal `jsr' instruction. The linker will also change
4577
the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
4578
instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a
4579
pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the
4580
function trampoline.
4581
 
4582

4583
File: ld.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: HPPA ELF32,  Prev: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
4584
 
4585
4.4 `ld' and the ARM family
4586
===========================
4587
 
4588
For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
4589
between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
4590
been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
4591
option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
4592
libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
4593
option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
4594
given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
4595
which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
4596
the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
4597
non-interworking aware Thumb code.
4598
 
4599
   The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
4600
switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.  But it also
4601
sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
4602
a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
4603
straight away.
4604
 
4605
   The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
4606
executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
4607
The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
4608
 
4609
   The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
4610
`.init_array' section.  It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
4611
`R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target.  The `--target1-rel' and
4612
`--target1-abs' switches override the default.
4613
 
4614
   The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
4615
`R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation.  Valid values for `type', their meanings,
4616
and target defaults are as follows:
4617
`rel'
4618
     `R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
4619
 
4620
`abs'
4621
     `R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
4622
 
4623
`got-rel'
4624
     `R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
4625
 
4626
   The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
4627
enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
4628
interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
4629
but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
4630
objects.
4631
 
4632
   In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
4633
linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
4634
PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
4635
 
4636
   In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
4637
relocations are ignored.
4638
 
4639
   Replace `BX rM' instructions identified by `R_ARM_V4BX' relocations
4640
with a branch to the following veneer:
4641
 
4642
     TST rM, #1
4643
     MOVEQ PC, rM
4644
     BX Rn
4645
 
4646
   This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
4647
cores and are still interworking safe.  Note that the above veneer
4648
clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in
4649
rare cases.
4650
 
4651
   The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
4652
instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
4653
Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
4654
BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
4655
entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
4656
 
4657
   This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
4658
to specify it if you are using that target.
4659
 
4660
   The `--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
4661
bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
4662
instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
4663
code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
4664
before the support code can read the intended values.
4665
 
4666
   The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
4667
intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
4668
register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
4669
at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug
4670
only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
4671
workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for
4672
further details.
4673
 
4674
   If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
4675
workaround by specifying the linker option `--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if
4676
you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or `--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'
4677
if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
4678
The default is `--vfp-denorm-fix=none'.
4679
 
4680
   If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
4681
potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
4682
such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
4683
first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
4684
instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
4685
the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
4686
are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
4687
 
4688
   The `--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
4689
when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
4690
size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
4691
object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
4692
enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
4693
diagnosed.
4694
 
4695
   The `--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from
4696
warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
4697
`wchar_t' size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
4698
linking of an object file using 32-bit `wchar_t' values with another
4699
using 16-bit `wchar_t' values will not be diagnosed.
4700
 
4701
   The `--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
4702
ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
4703
PIC.  This avoids problems on uClinux targets where `--emit-relocs' is
4704
used to generate relocatable binaries.
4705
 
4706
   The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
4707
code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
4708
perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away.  The
4709
placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
4710
controlled by the command line option `--stub-group-size=N'.  The
4711
placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
4712
duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw.  The linker will try to
4713
group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
4714
code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
4715
where they should be placed.
4716
 
4717
   The value of `N', the parameter to the `--stub-group-size=' option
4718
controls where the stub groups are placed.  If it is negative then all
4719
stubs are placed before the first branch that needs them.  If it is
4720
positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
4721
branches that need them.  If the value of `N' is 1 (either +1 or -1)
4722
then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
4723
using its built in heuristics.  A value of `N' greater than 1 (or
4724
smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
4725
service at most `N' bytes from the input sections.
4726
 
4727
   The default, if `--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is `N = +1'.
4728
 
4729
   Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
4730
only, because it relies on object files properties not present
4731
otherwise.
4732
 
4733

4734
File: ld.info,  Node: HPPA ELF32,  Next: M68K,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Machine Dependent
4735
 
4736
4.5 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
4737
====================================
4738
 
4739
When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
4740
stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
4741
`--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
4742
different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
4743
sub-spaces.
4744
 
4745
   Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
4746
sections located between groups of input sections.  `--stub-group-size'
4747
specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
4748
stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
4749
serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
4750
and one group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that
4751
require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
4752
sections only serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for
4753
`N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
4754
negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
4755
`-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
4756
groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
4757
stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
4758
 
4759
   Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
4760
single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
4761
create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
4762
large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
4763
 
4764

4765
File: ld.info,  Node: M68K,  Next: MMIX,  Prev: HPPA ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
4766
 
4767
4.6 `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
4768
====================================
4769
 
4770
The `--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.  The
4771
choices are `single', `negative', `multigot' and `target'.  When
4772
`target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
4773
scheme for the current target.  `single' tells the linker to generate a
4774
single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets.  `negative'
4775
instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
4776
negative and positive offsets.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
4777
`multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
4778
file.  All GOT references from a single input object file access the
4779
same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
4780
different GOTs.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
4781
 
4782

4783
File: ld.info,  Node: MMIX,  Next: MSP430,  Prev: M68K,  Up: Machine Dependent
4784
 
4785
4.7 `ld' and MMIX
4786
=================
4787
 
4788
For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
4789
object files when linking.  The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
4790
format.  The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
4791
formats.
4792
 
4793
   There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
4794
Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
4795
registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
4796
symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
4797
`.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
4798
register multiplied by 8.  Register `$255' is not included in this
4799
section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
4800
`Main' for `mmo' files.
4801
 
4802
   Global symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
4803
`__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special.  The
4804
default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
4805
section.
4806
 
4807
   Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
4808
section, are left out from an mmo file.
4809
 
4810

4811
File: ld.info,  Node: MSP430,  Next: M68HC11/68HC12,  Prev: MMIX,  Up: Machine Dependent
4812
 
4813
4.8 `ld' and MSP430
4814
===================
4815
 
4816
For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
4817
`-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
4818
MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
4819
the linker).
4820
 
4821
   The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
4822
specific:
4823
 
4824
``.vectors''
4825
     Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
4826
 
4827
``.bootloader''
4828
     Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
4829
     code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
4830
 
4831
``.infomem''
4832
     Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
4833
     this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
4834
 
4835
``.infomemnobits''
4836
     This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
4837
     this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
4838
 
4839
``.noinit''
4840
     Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
4841
 
4842
     The last two sections are used by gcc.
4843
 
4844

4845
File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC ELF32,  Next: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Prev: M68HC11/68HC12,  Up: Machine Dependent
4846
 
4847
4.9 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
4848
=======================================
4849
 
4850
Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
4851
displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
4852
fit' errors with very large programs.  `--relax' enables the generation
4853
of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
4854
trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
4855
be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.
4856
 
4857
`--bss-plt'
4858
     Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
4859
     code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
4860
     security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
4861
     writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
4862
     `ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
4863
     if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
4864
     compiled with `-msecure-plt'.  `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
4865
     (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
4866
 
4867
`--secure-plt'
4868
     `ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
4869
     `-fpic' or `-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
4870
     linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
4871
     layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the
4872
     old style BSS PLT.
4873
 
4874
`--sdata-got'
4875
     The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
4876
     sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The
4877
     location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
4878
     initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The
4879
     reason for the `.got' change is more subtle:  The new placement
4880
     allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
4881
     relro -z now'.  However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
4882
     always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
4883
     accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
4884
     `--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn't
4885
     use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
4886
     useful for other compilers that may do so.
4887
 
4888
`--emit-stub-syms'
4889
     This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
4890
     that encodes the stub type and destination.
4891
 
4892
`--no-tls-optimize'
4893
     PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
4894
     used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
4895
     the optimization.
4896
 
4897

4898
File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Next: SPU ELF,  Prev: PowerPC ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
4899
 
4900
4.10 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
4901
==========================================
4902
 
4903
`--stub-group-size'
4904
     Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are
4905
     placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
4906
     sections.  `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
4907
     group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
4908
     offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
4909
     sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
4910
     it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
4911
     it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
4912
     serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for `N'
4913
     chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
4914
     negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
4915
     and `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
4916
     section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
4917
     behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
4918
     values of `N' respectively.
4919
 
4920
     Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
4921
     single input section larger than the group size specified will of
4922
     course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
4923
     are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
4924
     stub.
4925
 
4926
`--emit-stub-syms'
4927
     This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
4928
     that encodes the stub type and destination.
4929
 
4930
`--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
4931
     These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
4932
     a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
4933
     function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
4934
     a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.').  To
4935
     properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
4936
     to control both `foo' and `.foo'.  The option `--dotsyms', on by
4937
     default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
4938
     Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
4939
 
4940
`--no-tls-optimize'
4941
     PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
4942
     sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
4943
     disable the optimization.
4944
 
4945
`--no-opd-optimize'
4946
     PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
4947
     corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
4948
     by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker script `/DISCARD/'.
4949
     Use this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
4950
 
4951
`--non-overlapping-opd'
4952
     Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
4953
     `.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
4954
     the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
4955
     next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
4956
 
4957
`--no-toc-optimize'
4958
     PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
4959
     Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
4960
     the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
4961
     a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
4962
     a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
4963
     relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
4964
     unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
4965
     reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
4966
     discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
4967
     reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
4968
     assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
4969
     disable the optimization.
4970
 
4971
`--no-multi-toc'
4972
     By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
4973
     entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
4974
     total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 `ld' extends this limit by
4975
     grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for
4976
     its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
4977
     inter-group calls.  `ld' does not split apart input sections, so
4978
     cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc' section that
4979
     exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with `ld -r'.
4980
     Use this option to turn off this feature.
4981
 
4982

4983
File: ld.info,  Node: SPU ELF,  Next: TI COFF,  Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Up: Machine Dependent
4984
 
4985
4.11 `ld' and SPU ELF Support
4986
=============================
4987
 
4988
`--plugin'
4989
     This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
4990
 
4991
`--no-overlays'
4992
     Normally, `ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
4993
     regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
4994
     `ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option turns
4995
     off all this special overlay handling.
4996
 
4997
`--emit-stub-syms'
4998
     This option causes `ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
4999
     that encodes the stub type and destination.
5000
 
5001
`--extra-overlay-stubs'
5002
     This option causes `ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
5003
     calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added on
5004
     calls to non-overlay regions.
5005
 
5006
`--local-store=lo:hi'
5007
     `ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
5008
     address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
5009
     range.  Disable the check entirely with `--local-store=0:0'.
5010
 
5011
`--stack-analysis'
5012
     SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
5013
     unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
5014
     under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this
5015
     option, `ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
5016
     `ld' does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine
5017
     the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for
5018
     stack adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking
5019
     for relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched
5020
     for the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
5021
     find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
5022
     recursion and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
5023
     under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage
5024
     for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected.  If a
5025
     link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
5026
     stack usage and calls will be given.
5027
 
5028
`--emit-stack-syms'
5029
     This option, if given along with `--stack-analysis' will result in
5030
     `ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.  These take
5031
     the form `__stack_' for global functions, and
5032
     `__stack__' for static functions.
5033
     `' is the section id in hex.  The value of such symbols is
5034
     the stack requirement for the corresponding function.  The symbol
5035
     size will be zero, type `STT_NOTYPE', binding `STB_LOCAL', and
5036
     section `SHN_ABS'.
5037
 
5038

5039
File: ld.info,  Node: TI COFF,  Next: WIN32,  Prev: SPU ELF,  Up: Machine Dependent
5040
 
5041
4.12 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
5042
================================================
5043
 
5044
The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
5045
versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
5046
supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
5047
`ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
5048
depends on the default specified by the specific target.
5049
 
5050

5051
File: ld.info,  Node: WIN32,  Next: Xtensa,  Prev: TI COFF,  Up: Machine Dependent
5052
 
5053
4.13 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5054
==================================
5055
 
5056
This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues.  See
5057
*Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
5058
command line options mentioned here.
5059
 
5060
_import libraries_
5061
     The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
5062
     libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They
5063
     are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
5064
     archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
5065
     for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
5066
     command line option.
5067
 
5068
_exporting DLL symbols_
5069
     The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
5070
 
5071
    _using auto-export functionality_
5072
          By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
5073
          functionality, which is controlled by the following command
5074
          line options:
5075
 
5076
             * -export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
5077
 
5078
             * -exclude-symbols
5079
 
5080
             * -exclude-libs
5081
 
5082
          If, however, `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly
5083
          on the command line, then the default auto-export behavior
5084
          will be _disabled_ if either of the following are true:
5085
 
5086
             * A DEF file is used.
5087
 
5088
             * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
5089
               __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
5090
 
5091
    _using a DEF file_
5092
          Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
5093
          file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
5094
          should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is
5095
          named `.def' and is added as any other object file
5096
          to the linker's command line.  The file's name must end in
5097
          `.def' or `.DEF'.
5098
 
5099
               gcc -o   .def
5100
 
5101
          Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
5102
          unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
5103
 
5104
          Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
5105
          `xyz.dll':
5106
 
5107
               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
5108
 
5109
               EXPORTS
5110
               foo
5111
               bar
5112
               _bar = bar
5113
               another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
5114
               var1 DATA
5115
 
5116
          This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
5117
          and five symbols in the export table. The third exported
5118
          symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
5119
          `another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
5120
          and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
5121
          `abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
5122
          object.
5123
 
5124
          The optional `LIBRARY ' command indicates the _internal_
5125
          name of the output DLL. If `' does not include a suffix,
5126
          the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
5127
 
5128
          When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
5129
          than a library, the `NAME ' command should be used
5130
          instead of `LIBRARY'. If `' does not include a suffix,
5131
          the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
5132
 
5133
          With either `LIBRARY ' or `NAME ' the optional
5134
          specification `BASE = ' may be used to specify a
5135
          non-default base address for the image.
5136
 
5137
          If neither `LIBRARY ' nor  `NAME ' is specified,
5138
          or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
5139
          same as the filename specified on the command line.
5140
 
5141
          The complete specification of an export symbol is:
5142
 
5143
               EXPORTS
5144
                 ( (  (  [ =  ] )
5145
                    | (  =  . ))
5146
                 [ @  ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
5147
 
5148
          Declares `' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
5149
          declares `' as an exported alias for `'; or
5150
          declares `' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
5151
          `' in the DLL `'.  Optionally,
5152
          the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
5153
          `' alias.
5154
 
5155
          The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
5156
 
5157
          `NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
5158
          table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
5159
          (either the value specified by the .def specification or,
5160
          otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
5161
          name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
5162
          any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
5163
 
5164
          `DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
5165
          function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
5166
          reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
5167
          be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
5168
 
5169
          `CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
5170
          well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
5171
          read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
5172
          to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
5173
          code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
5174
          explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
5175
          attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
5176
 
5177
          `PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
5178
          not put it into the static import library used to resolve
5179
          imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
5180
          the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
5181
          using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
5182
          without an import library.
5183
 
5184
          See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
5185
          specification of other DEF file statements
5186
 
5187
          While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
5188
          with the `--output-def ' command line option.
5189
 
5190
    _Using decorations_
5191
          Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
5192
          source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
5193
          to be exported is declared as:
5194
 
5195
               __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
5196
               __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
5197
 
5198
          All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
5199
          any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
5200
          in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
5201
          disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
5202
          used.
5203
 
5204
          Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
5205
          _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
5206
          dllimport, instead:
5207
 
5208
               __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
5209
               __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
5210
 
5211
          This complicates the structure of library header files,
5212
          because when included by the library itself the header must
5213
          declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
5214
          included by client code the header must declare them as
5215
          dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
5216
          used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
5217
          declaration completely.  See `--enable-auto-import' and
5218
          `automatic data imports' for more information.
5219
 
5220
_automatic data imports_
5221
     The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
5222
     only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
5223
     let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
5224
     with this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port
5225
     existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
5226
     libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
5227
     initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
5228
     decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on
5229
     POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
5230
     `--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
5231
     by default on cygwin/mingw.  The `--enable-auto-import' option
5232
     itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
5233
     ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
5234
 
5235
     auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
5236
     additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
5237
 
5238
     "variable '' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
5239
     documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
5240
 
5241
     The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
5242
     occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
5243
     difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
5244
     feature, described below.
5245
 
5246
     For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
5247
     classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
5248
     variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
5249
     particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
5250
     the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
5251
     fixing these references at runtime without the additional
5252
     information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
5253
     standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
5254
     these references.
5255
 
5256
     The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
5257
     references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
5258
     adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
5259
     to specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
5260
     versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
5261
     provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
5262
     support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
5263
     compiled result will run without error on an older system.
5264
 
5265
     `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
5266
     explicitly enabled as needed.
5267
 
5268
_direct linking to a dll_
5269
     The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
5270
     including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
5271
     libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than
5272
     does the traditional import library method, especially when
5273
     linking large libraries or applications.  When `ld' creates an
5274
     import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
5275
     stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
5276
     exports.  The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
5277
     processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
5278
     tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
5279
     particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
5280
 
5281
     Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
5282
     other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
5283
     number of names to match each library.  All that is needed from
5284
     the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
5285
     order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
5286
 
5287
     For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
5288
     attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
5289
 
5290
          libxxx.dll.a
5291
          xxx.dll.a
5292
          libxxx.a
5293
          xxx.lib
5294
          cygxxx.dll (*)
5295
          libxxx.dll
5296
          xxx.dll
5297
 
5298
     before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
5299
 
5300
     (*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
5301
     `xxx.dll', where `' is set by the `ld' option
5302
     `--dll-search-prefix='. In the case of cygwin, the
5303
     standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
5304
     effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
5305
 
5306
     Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
5307
     use other `'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
5308
     of this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
5309
     conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
5310
     environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
5311
     could coexist on the same machine.
5312
 
5313
     The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
5314
     applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
5315
     libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
5316
 
5317
          bin/
5318
                cygxxx.dll
5319
          lib/
5320
                libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
5321
                libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
5322
 
5323
     Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
5324
     done two ways:
5325
 
5326
     1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
5327
          gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
5328
 
5329
     However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
5330
     names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
5331
     specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version.  Import
5332
     libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
5333
 
5334
     2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
5335
     directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
5336
     should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
5337
     making the app/dll.
5338
 
5339
          ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
5340
 
5341
     Then you can link without any make environment changes.
5342
 
5343
          gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
5344
 
5345
     This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
5346
     the following is perfectly legal
5347
 
5348
          bin/
5349
                cygxxx-5.dll
5350
          lib/
5351
                libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
5352
 
5353
     Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
5354
     even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
5355
     `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
5356
 
5357
     Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
5358
     justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There
5359
     are three reasons:
5360
 
5361
     1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
5362
     work with auto-imported data.
5363
 
5364
     2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
5365
     the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
5366
     indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
5367
     the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
5368
     and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
5369
 
5370
     3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This
5371
     is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
5372
     API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
5373
     of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
5374
 
5375
     So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
5376
     true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
5377
     dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
5378
     binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
5379
     massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
5380
     requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
5381
     will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
5382
 
5383
_symbol aliasing_
5384
 
5385
    _adding additional names_
5386
          Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
5387
          names.  A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
5388
          also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
5389
          DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
5390
          optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
5391
          file:
5392
 
5393
               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
5394
 
5395
               EXPORTS
5396
               foo
5397
               _foo = foo
5398
 
5399
          The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
5400
 
5401
          Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
5402
          the source code using the "weak" attribute:
5403
 
5404
               void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
5405
               void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
5406
 
5407
          See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
5408
          weak symbols.
5409
 
5410
    _renaming symbols_
5411
          Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
5412
          cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol `_foo' can be
5413
          exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
5414
          directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
5415
          library, if it is created).  In the following example:
5416
 
5417
               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
5418
 
5419
               EXPORTS
5420
               _foo = foo
5421
 
5422
          The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
5423
          `_foo'.
5424
 
5425
     Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
5426
     unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
5427
     If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
5428
     _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
5429
     are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
5430
     option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
5431
     use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
5432
     both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
5433
     symbols will be exported.  In effect, you'd be aliasing those
5434
     symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
5435
 
5436
_weak externals_
5437
     The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
5438
     called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the
5439
     symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
5440
     other symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
5441
        * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
5442
          historically called lazy externals.
5443
 
5444
        * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
5445
          libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
5446
 
5447
        * No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
5448
          implemented.
5449
     As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
5450
     symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking,
5451
     the symbol uses a default value.
5452
 
5453

5454
File: ld.info,  Node: Xtensa,  Prev: WIN32,  Up: Machine Dependent
5455
 
5456
4.14 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
5457
===============================
5458
 
5459
The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
5460
`SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
5461
specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
5462
keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
5463
example, with the command:
5464
 
5465
     SECTIONS
5466
     {
5467
       .text : {
5468
         *(.literal .text)
5469
       }
5470
     }
5471
 
5472
`ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
5473
different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
5474
range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place
5475
the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
5476
`.text' sections of that group of files.  Then, the `.literal' sections
5477
from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
5478
the files would follow.
5479
 
5480
   Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
5481
provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
5482
is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
5483
literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
5484
will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
5485
location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
5486
the `L32R' instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
5487
unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
5488
`L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
5489
`CALLN' instructions.
5490
 
5491
   For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
5492
optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
5493
instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
5494
and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
5495
not used for anything else.  Removing the `L32R' instruction always
5496
reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
5497
alignment of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will
5498
always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
5499
between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
5500
inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
5501
If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
5502
option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
5503
instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
5504
are required for correctness.
5505
 
5506
   The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
5507
control the linker:
5508
 
5509
`--no-relax'
5510
     Since the Xtensa version of `ld' enables the `--relax' option by
5511
     default, the `--no-relax' option is provided to disable relaxation.
5512
 
5513
`--size-opt'
5514
     When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
5515
     size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
5516
     insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
5517
     target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
5518
     required to preserve the correctness of the code.
5519
 
5520

5521
File: ld.info,  Node: BFD,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: Machine Dependent,  Up: Top
5522
 
5523
5 BFD
5524
*****
5525
 
5526
The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
5527
These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
5528
object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
5529
format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
5530
it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
5531
associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
5532
object file formats available.  You can use `objdump -i' (*note
5533
objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
5534
your configuration.
5535
 
5536
   As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
5537
conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
5538
efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
5539
would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
5540
offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
5541
back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
5542
greater speed.
5543
 
5544
   One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
5545
is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
5546
useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
5547
conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
5548
 
5549
* Menu:
5550
 
5551
* BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
5552
 
5553

5554
File: ld.info,  Node: BFD outline,  Up: BFD
5555
 
5556
5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
5557
===================================
5558
 
5559
When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
5560
the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
5561
memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
5562
the object file's data structures.
5563
 
5564
   As different information from the object files is required, BFD
5565
reads from different sections of the file and processes them.  For
5566
example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
5567
tables.  Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
5568
the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
5569
format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
5570
calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
5571
back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form.  The
5572
linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
5573
and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
5574
end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
5575
convert it into the chosen output format.
5576
 
5577
* Menu:
5578
 
5579
* BFD information loss::        Information Loss
5580
* Canonical format::            The BFD canonical object-file format
5581
 
5582

5583
File: ld.info,  Node: BFD information loss,  Next: Canonical format,  Up: BFD outline
5584
 
5585
5.1.1 Information Loss
5586
----------------------
5587
 
5588
_Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
5589
by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
5590
be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
5591
example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
5592
in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
5593
contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
5594
image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
5595
output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
5596
internally, so the link is performed correctly).
5597
 
5598
   Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
5599
unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
5600
the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
5601
(e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
5602
the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
5603
describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
5604
command language.
5605
 
5606
   _Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
5607
canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
5608
structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
5609
internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
5610
possible data richness through the transformation between external to
5611
internal and back to external formats.
5612
 
5613
   This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
5614
format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
5615
maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
5616
form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
5617
to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
5618
is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
5619
end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
5620
is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
5621
able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
5622
information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
5623
commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
5624
linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
5625
`b.out'.  When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
5626
lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
5627
 
5628

5629
File: ld.info,  Node: Canonical format,  Prev: BFD information loss,  Up: BFD outline
5630
 
5631
5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
5632
------------------------------------------
5633
 
5634
The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
5635
least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
5636
that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
5637
format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
5638
understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
5639
conversions.
5640
 
5641
_files_
5642
     Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
5643
     architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
5644
     pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
5645
     magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
5646
     so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
5647
     write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
5648
     stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
5649
     files may be used with one another.
5650
 
5651
_sections_
5652
     Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
5653
     the section's original address in the object file, size and
5654
     alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
5655
     data structures.
5656
 
5657
_symbols_
5658
     Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
5659
     file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
5660
     flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
5661
     relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
5662
     section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
5663
     symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
5664
     varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
5665
     the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
5666
     for that symbol is accessible.  `ld' can operate on a collection
5667
     of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
5668
 
5669
     Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
5670
     so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
5671
     pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
5672
     Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
5673
     information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
5674
     This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
5675
     linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
5676
 
5677
     There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
5678
     format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
5679
     example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
5680
     within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
5681
     information will be preserved.
5682
 
5683
_relocation level_
5684
     Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
5685
     symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
5686
     section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
5687
     descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
5688
     the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
5689
     relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
5690
     method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
5691
     instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
5692
     record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
5693
     routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
5694
     byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
5695
     such relocation type.
5696
 
5697
_line numbers_
5698
     Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
5699
     mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
5700
     output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
5701
     symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
5702
     number records points to the first record of the list.  The head
5703
     of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
5704
     allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
5705
     is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
5706
     offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
5707
     simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
5708
     formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
5709
 
5710

5711
File: ld.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: MRI,  Prev: BFD,  Up: Top
5712
 
5713
6 Reporting Bugs
5714
****************
5715
 
5716
Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
5717
 
5718
   Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
5719
or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
5720
is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
5721
better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
5722
 
5723
   In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
5724
information that enables us to fix the bug.
5725
 
5726
* Menu:
5727
 
5728
* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
5729
* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
5730
 
5731

5732
File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: Reporting Bugs
5733
 
5734
6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
5735
=========================
5736
 
5737
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
5738
guidelines:
5739
 
5740
   * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
5741
     a `ld' bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
5742
 
5743
   * If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
5744
 
5745
   * If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
5746
     may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
5747
     object files are correct.
5748
 
5749
   * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
5750
     improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
5751
 
5752

5753
File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Reporting Bugs
5754
 
5755
6.2 How to Report Bugs
5756
======================
5757
 
5758
A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
5759
If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
5760
contact that organization first.
5761
 
5762
   You can find contact information for many support companies and
5763
individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
5764
 
5765
   Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to
5766
`http://www.sourceware.org/bugzilla/'.
5767
 
5768
   The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
5769
*report all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
5770
leave it out, state it!
5771
 
5772
   Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
5773
problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
5774
assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
5775
Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug
5776
is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location
5777
where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
5778
different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into
5779
doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
5780
specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
5781
and the most helpful.
5782
 
5783
   Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
5784
the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
5785
on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
5786
 
5787
   Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
5788
bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
5789
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
5790
might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
5791
 
5792
   To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
5793
 
5794
   * The version of `ld'.  `ld' announces it if you start it with the
5795
     `--version' argument.
5796
 
5797
     Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
5798
     looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
5799
 
5800
   * Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
5801
     patches made to the `BFD' library.
5802
 
5803
   * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
5804
     and version number.
5805
 
5806
   * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
5807
     "`gcc-2.7'".
5808
 
5809
   * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
5810
     observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
5811
     important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
5812
     from make) is sufficient.
5813
 
5814
     If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
5815
     wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
5816
 
5817
   * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
5818
     the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
5819
     files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
5820
     10K.  For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
5821
     or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
5822
     file(s) to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be
5823
     going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
5824
     large attachments).  But small attachments are best.
5825
 
5826
     If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
5827
     `gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
5828
     object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
5829
     `gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
5830
     `gas' or `gcc' were configured.
5831
 
5832
   * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
5833
     incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
5834
 
5835
     Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
5836
     will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
5837
     might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
5838
     not give us a chance to make a mistake.
5839
 
5840
     Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
5841
     still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
5842
     such as, your copy of `ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
5843
     a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
5844
     copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
5845
     crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
5846
     was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
5847
     crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
5848
     observations.
5849
 
5850
   * If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
5851
     diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
5852
     Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
5853
     discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
5854
     by line number.
5855
 
5856
     The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
5857
     in your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful
5858
     information to us.
5859
 
5860
   Here are some things that are not necessary:
5861
 
5862
   * A description of the envelope of the bug.
5863
 
5864
     Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
5865
     which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
5866
     changes will not affect it.
5867
 
5868
     This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
5869
     we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
5870
     debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
5871
     examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
5872
 
5873
     Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
5874
     of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
5875
     output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
5876
     less time, and so on.
5877
 
5878
     However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
5879
     this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
5880
     used.
5881
 
5882
   * A patch for the bug.
5883
 
5884
     A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
5885
     omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
5886
     assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems
5887
     with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
5888
     might not understand it at all.
5889
 
5890
     Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
5891
     construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
5892
     path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
5893
     not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
5894
     that the bug is fixed.
5895
 
5896
     And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
5897
     your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
5898
     test case will help us to understand.
5899
 
5900
   * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
5901
 
5902
     Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
5903
     such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
5904
 
5905

5906
File: ld.info,  Node: MRI,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top
5907
 
5908
Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
5909
**************************************
5910
 
5911
To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
5912
`ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
5913
more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note
5914
Scripts::.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
5915
set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'.  GNU `ld'
5916
supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
5917
described here.
5918
 
5919
   In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
5920
file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
5921
features to make use of them.
5922
 
5923
   You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
5924
`-c' command-line option.
5925
 
5926
   Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
5927
command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
5928
blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
5929
MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
5930
a warning message, but continues processing the script.
5931
 
5932
   Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
5933
 
5934
   You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
5935
lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'.  The following
5936
list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
5937
 
5938
`ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
5939
`ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
5940
     Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
5941
     the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
5942
     use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
5943
     present in your output program.  If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
5944
     at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
5945
     `ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
5946
     still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
5947
     line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
5948
 
5949
`ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
5950
     Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
5951
     in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
5952
 
5953
     IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
5954
 
5955
`ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
5956
     Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
5957
     should be a power of two.
5958
 
5959
`BASE EXPRESSION'
5960
     Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
5961
     absolute addresses) in the output file.
5962
 
5963
`CHIP EXPRESSION'
5964
`CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
5965
     This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
5966
 
5967
`END'
5968
     This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
5969
     compatibility.
5970
 
5971
`FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
5972
     Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
5973
     language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
5974
 
5975
       1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
5976
 
5977
       2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
5978
 
5979
       3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
5980
          `COFF'
5981
 
5982
`LIST ANYTHING...'
5983
     Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
5984
     `ld' command-line option `-M'.
5985
 
5986
     The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
5987
     with no change in its effect.
5988
 
5989
`LOAD FILENAME'
5990
`LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
5991
     Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
5992
     same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
5993
     line.
5994
 
5995
`NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
5996
     OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
5997
     MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
5998
     option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
5999
 
6000
`ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
6001
`ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
6002
     Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
6003
     in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
6004
     MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
6005
     `ORDER' command.  The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
6006
     first in your output file, in the order specified.
6007
 
6008
`PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
6009
`PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
6010
`PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
6011
     Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
6012
     linker input files.
6013
 
6014
`SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
6015
`SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
6016
`SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
6017
     You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
6018
     specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If
6019
     you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
6020
     the _first_ sets the start address.
6021
 
6022

6023
File: ld.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: LD Index,  Prev: MRI,  Up: Top
6024
 
6025
Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
6026
*****************************************
6027
 
6028
                        Version 1.1, March 2000
6029
 
6030
     Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6031
     51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
6032
 
6033
     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
6034
     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
6035
 
6036
 
6037
  0. PREAMBLE
6038
 
6039
     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
6040
     written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
6041
     the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
6042
     modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily,
6043
     this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
6044
     credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
6045
     modifications made by others.
6046
 
6047
     This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
6048
     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
6049
     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
6050
     license designed for free software.
6051
 
6052
     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
6053
     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
6054
     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
6055
     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
6056
     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
6057
     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
6058
     We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
6059
     instruction or reference.
6060
 
6061
 
6062
  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
6063
 
6064
     This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
6065
     notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
6066
     under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to
6067
     any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee,
6068
     and is addressed as "you."
6069
 
6070
     A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
6071
     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
6072
     modifications and/or translated into another language.
6073
 
6074
     A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter
6075
     section of the Document that deals exclusively with the
6076
     relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the
6077
     Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains
6078
     nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject.
6079
     (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of
6080
     mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.)
6081
     The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with
6082
     the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial,
6083
     philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
6084
 
6085
     The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
6086
     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
6087
     the notice that says that the Document is released under this
6088
     License.
6089
 
6090
     The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
6091
     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
6092
     that says that the Document is released under this License.
6093
 
6094
     A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
6095
     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
6096
     general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly
6097
     and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
6098
     composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
6099
     widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
6100
     text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
6101
     formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
6102
     otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed
6103
     to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not
6104
     Transparent.  A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque."
6105
 
6106
     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
6107
     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
6108
     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
6109
     standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification.
6110
     Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that
6111
     can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML
6112
     or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
6113
     available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word
6114
     processors for output purposes only.
6115
 
6116
     The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
6117
     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
6118
     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
6119
     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
6120
     Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
6121
     work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
6122
 
6123
  2. VERBATIM COPYING
6124
 
6125
     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
6126
     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
6127
     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
6128
     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
6129
     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
6130
     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
6131
     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
6132
     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
6133
     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
6134
     the conditions in section 3.
6135
 
6136
     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
6137
     and you may publicly display copies.
6138
 
6139
  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
6140
 
6141
     If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
6142
     100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you
6143
     must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly,
6144
     all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
6145
     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
6146
     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
6147
     front cover must present the full title with all words of the
6148
     title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
6149
     on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
6150
     covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
6151
     satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
6152
     other respects.
6153
 
6154
     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
6155
     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
6156
     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
6157
     adjacent pages.
6158
 
6159
     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
6160
     numbering more than 100, you must either include a
6161
     machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
6162
     state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible
6163
     computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy
6164
     of the Document, free of added material, which the general
6165
     network-using public has access to download anonymously at no
6166
     charge using public-standard network protocols.  If you use the
6167
     latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
6168
     begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
6169
     this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
6170
     location until at least one year after the last time you
6171
     distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
6172
     retailers) of that edition to the public.
6173
 
6174
     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
6175
     the Document well before redistributing any large number of
6176
     copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
6177
     version of the Document.
6178
 
6179
  4. MODIFICATIONS
6180
 
6181
     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
6182
     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
6183
     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
6184
     the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
6185
     licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
6186
     whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
6187
     things in the Modified Version:
6188
 
6189
     A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
6190
     distinct    from that of the Document, and from those of previous
6191
     versions    (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
6192
     History section    of the Document).  You may use the same title
6193
     as a previous version    if the original publisher of that version
6194
     gives permission.
6195
     B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
6196
     entities    responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
6197
     Modified    Version, together with at least five of the principal
6198
     authors of the    Document (all of its principal authors, if it
6199
     has less than five).
6200
     C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
6201
     Modified Version, as the publisher.
6202
     D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
6203
     E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
6204
     adjacent to the other copyright notices.
6205
     F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
6206
     notice    giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
6207
     under the    terms of this License, in the form shown in the
6208
     Addendum below.
6209
     G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
6210
     Sections    and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
6211
     license notice.
6212
     H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
6213
     I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
6214
     to    it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
6215
       publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.
6216
     If    there is no section entitled "History" in the Document,
6217
     create one    stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of
6218
     the Document as    given on its Title Page, then add an item
6219
     describing the Modified    Version as stated in the previous
6220
     sentence.
6221
     J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
6222
       public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
6223
     likewise    the network locations given in the Document for
6224
     previous versions    it was based on.  These may be placed in the
6225
     "History" section.     You may omit a network location for a work
6226
     that was published at    least four years before the Document
6227
     itself, or if the original    publisher of the version it refers
6228
     to gives permission.
6229
     K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
6230
     preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
6231
      substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
6232
     and/or dedications given therein.
6233
     L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
6234
     unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
6235
     or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
6236
     M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements."  Such a section
6237
     may not be included in the Modified Version.
6238
     N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements"    or to
6239
     conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
6240
 
6241
     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
6242
     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
6243
     material copied from the Document, you may at your option
6244
     designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
6245
     add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
6246
     Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
6247
     other section titles.
6248
 
6249
     You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
6250
     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
6251
     parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
6252
     been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition
6253
     of a standard.
6254
 
6255
     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
6256
     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
6257
     of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
6258
     passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
6259
     added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
6260
     Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
6261
     previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
6262
     you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
6263
     replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
6264
     publisher that added the old one.
6265
 
6266
     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
6267
     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
6268
     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
6269
 
6270
  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
6271
 
6272
     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
6273
     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
6274
     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
6275
     all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
6276
     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
6277
     combined work in its license notice.
6278
 
6279
     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
6280
     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
6281
     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
6282
     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
6283
     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
6284
     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
6285
     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
6286
     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
6287
     combined work.
6288
 
6289
     In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
6290
     "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
6291
     entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled
6292
     "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications."  You
6293
     must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
6294
 
6295
  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
6296
 
6297
     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
6298
     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
6299
     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
6300
     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
6301
     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
6302
     documents in all other respects.
6303
 
6304
     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
6305
     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
6306
     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
6307
     this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
6308
     that document.
6309
 
6310
  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
6311
 
6312
     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
6313
     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
6314
     a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a
6315
     Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation
6316
     copyright is claimed for the compilation.  Such a compilation is
6317
     called an "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the
6318
     other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on
6319
     account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves
6320
     derivative works of the Document.
6321
 
6322
     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
6323
     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
6324
     quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be
6325
     placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
6326
     aggregate.  Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
6327
     aggregate.
6328
 
6329
  8. TRANSLATION
6330
 
6331
     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
6332
     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
6333
     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
6334
     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
6335
     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
6336
     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
6337
     translation of this License provided that you also include the
6338
     original English version of this License.  In case of a
6339
     disagreement between the translation and the original English
6340
     version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
6341
 
6342
  9. TERMINATION
6343
 
6344
     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
6345
     except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other
6346
     attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
6347
     void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
6348
     License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
6349
     from you under this License will not have their licenses
6350
     terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
6351
 
6352
 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
6353
 
6354
     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
6355
     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
6356
     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
6357
     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
6358
     http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
6359
 
6360
     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
6361
     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
6362
     version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
6363
     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
6364
     that specified version or of any later version that has been
6365
     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
6366
     the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
6367
     you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
6368
     Free Software Foundation.
6369
 
6370
 
6371
ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
6372
====================================================
6373
 
6374
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
6375
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
6376
notices just after the title page:
6377
 
6378
     Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
6379
     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
6380
     under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
6381
     or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
6382
     with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
6383
     Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
6384
     A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
6385
     Free Documentation License."
6386
 
6387
   If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
6388
instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no Front-Cover
6389
Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being
6390
LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
6391
 
6392
   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
6393
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
6394
free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
6395
permit their use in free software.
6396
 
6397

6398
File: ld.info,  Node: LD Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top
6399
 
6400
LD Index
6401
********
6402
 
6403
 
6404
* Menu:
6405
6406
* ":                                     Symbols.            (line    6)
6407
* -(:                                    Options.            (line  645)
6408
* --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line  663)
6409
* --add-needed:                          Options.            (line  685)
6410
* --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 1470)
6411
* --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line  910)
6412
* --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line  916)
6413
* --architecture=ARCH:                   Options.            (line  106)
6414
* --as-needed:                           Options.            (line  673)
6415
* --auxiliary:                           Options.            (line  207)
6416
* --bank-window:                         Options.            (line 1815)
6417
* --base-file:                           Options.            (line 1475)
6418
* --be8:                                 ARM.                (line   23)
6419
* --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
6420
* --build-id:                            Options.            (line 1432)
6421
* --build-id=STYLE:                      Options.            (line 1432)
6422
* --check-sections:                      Options.            (line  767)
6423
* --cref:                                Options.            (line  777)
6424
* --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line  944)
6425
* --default-script=SCRIPT:               Options.            (line  490)
6426
* --default-symver:                      Options.            (line  940)
6427
* --defsym SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line  805)
6428
* --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line  818)
6429
* --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 1622)
6430
* --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 1757)
6431
* --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 1395)
6432
* --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 1770)
6433
* --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 1485)
6434
* --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  536)
6435
* --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  540)
6436
* --dll:                                 Options.            (line 1480)
6437
* --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 1628)
6438
* --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
6439
* --dynamic-linker FILE:                 Options.            (line  831)
6440
* --dynamic-list-cpp-new:                Options.            (line  759)
6441
* --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo:           Options.            (line  763)
6442
* --dynamic-list-data:                   Options.            (line  756)
6443
* --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE:      Options.            (line  743)
6444
* --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 1391)
6445
* --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  425)
6446
* --emit-stack-syms:                     SPU ELF.            (line   46)
6447
* --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  SPU ELF.            (line   15)
6448
* --emit-stub-syms <2>:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
6449
* --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC ELF32.      (line   44)
6450
* --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 1614)
6451
* --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 1637)
6452
* --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 1775)
6453
* --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 1395)
6454
* --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 1762)
6455
* --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 1485)
6456
* --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  160)
6457
* --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 1344)
6458
* --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  170)
6459
* --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 1527)
6460
* --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1503)
6461
* --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  181)
6462
* --extra-overlay-stubs:                 SPU ELF.            (line   19)
6463
* --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line  837)
6464
* --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 1533)
6465
* --filter:                              Options.            (line  228)
6466
* --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line   44)
6467
* --fix-v4bx-interworking:               ARM.                (line   57)
6468
* --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  434)
6469
* --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line  842)
6470
* --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  117)
6471
* --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
6472
* --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line  852)
6473
* --got:                                 Options.            (line 1828)
6474
* --got=TYPE:                            M68K.               (line    6)
6475
* --gpsize:                              Options.            (line  261)
6476
* --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 1404)
6477
* --hash-style=STYLE:                    Options.            (line 1412)
6478
* --heap:                                Options.            (line 1539)
6479
* --help:                                Options.            (line  883)
6480
* --image-base:                          Options.            (line 1546)
6481
* --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  457)
6482
* --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 1555)
6483
* --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 1560)
6484
* --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  320)
6485
* --library=NAMESPEC:                    Options.            (line  287)
6486
* --local-store=lo:hi:                   SPU ELF.            (line   24)
6487
* --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1569)
6488
* --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1574)
6489
* --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1578)
6490
* --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1583)
6491
* --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1588)
6492
* --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1592)
6493
* --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  141)
6494
* --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
6495
* --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  389)
6496
* --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line  663)
6497
* --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line  685)
6498
* --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line  916)
6499
* --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line  673)
6500
* --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line  767)
6501
* --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line  789)
6502
* --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line  818)
6503
* --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
6504
* --no-enum-size-warning:                ARM.                (line  106)
6505
* --no-fatal-warnings:                   Options.            (line  837)
6506
* --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line  852)
6507
* --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line  895)
6508
* --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
6509
* --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  403)
6510
* --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
6511
* --no-overlays:                         SPU ELF.            (line    9)
6512
* --no-print-gc-sections:                Options.            (line  874)
6513
* --no-relax:                            Xtensa.             (line   56)
6514
* --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
6515
* --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC ELF32.      (line   48)
6516
* --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
6517
* --no-trampoline:                       Options.            (line 1809)
6518
* --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line  902)
6519
* --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line  935)
6520
* --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line  948)
6521
* --no-warn-search-mismatch:             Options.            (line  957)
6522
* --no-wchar-size-warning:               ARM.                (line  113)
6523
* --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line  961)
6524
* --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line  965)
6525
* --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
6526
* --oformat:                             Options.            (line  977)
6527
* --omagic:                              Options.            (line  394)
6528
* --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1605)
6529
* --output-def:                          Options.            (line 1597)
6530
* --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  409)
6531
* --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line  990)
6532
* --pic-veneer:                          ARM.                (line  119)
6533
* --plugin:                              SPU ELF.            (line    6)
6534
* --print-gc-sections:                   Options.            (line  874)
6535
* --print-map:                           Options.            (line  352)
6536
* --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 1418)
6537
* --relax:                               Options.            (line 1006)
6538
* --relax on i960:                       i960.               (line   31)
6539
* --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
6540
* --relax on Xtensa:                     Xtensa.             (line   27)
6541
* --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  438)
6542
* --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  481)
6543
* --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   30)
6544
* --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 1780)
6545
* --section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1181)
6546
* --secure-plt:                          PowerPC ELF32.      (line   23)
6547
* --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1126)
6548
* --sort-section alignment:              Options.            (line 1138)
6549
* --sort-section name:                   Options.            (line 1134)
6550
* --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1142)
6551
* --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1147)
6552
* --stack:                               Options.            (line 1786)
6553
* --stack-analysis:                      SPU ELF.            (line   29)
6554
* --stats:                               Options.            (line 1160)
6555
* --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  468)
6556
* --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  472)
6557
* --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
6558
* --stub-group-size=N <1>:               HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
6559
* --stub-group-size=N:                   ARM.                (line  124)
6560
* --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 1793)
6561
* --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line    6)
6562
* --sysroot:                             Options.            (line 1164)
6563
* --target-help:                         Options.            (line  887)
6564
* --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line   27)
6565
* --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line   27)
6566
* --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line   32)
6567
* --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line   17)
6568
* --trace:                               Options.            (line  477)
6569
* --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  546)
6570
* --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1169)
6571
* --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  503)
6572
* --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  521)
6573
* --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1196)
6574
* --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line   69)
6575
* --verbose:                             Options.            (line 1225)
6576
* --version:                             Options.            (line  530)
6577
* --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 1231)
6578
* --vfp11-denorm-fix:                    ARM.                (line   78)
6579
* --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 1238)
6580
* --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 1306)
6581
* --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 1311)
6582
* --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 1325)
6583
* --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 1329)
6584
* --warn-shared-textrel:                 Options.            (line 1336)
6585
* --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 1339)
6586
* --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 1348)
6587
* --wrap:                                Options.            (line 1362)
6588
* -AARCH:                                Options.            (line  105)
6589
* -aKEYWORD:                             Options.            (line   98)
6590
* -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line  695)
6591
* -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  117)
6592
* -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line  698)
6593
* -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line  708)
6594
* -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1118)
6595
* -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line  715)
6596
* -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line  730)
6597
* -Bsymbolic-functions:                  Options.            (line  737)
6598
* -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  141)
6599
* -call_shared:                          Options.            (line  698)
6600
* -d:                                    Options.            (line  151)
6601
* -dc:                                   Options.            (line  151)
6602
* -dn:                                   Options.            (line  715)
6603
* -dp:                                   Options.            (line  151)
6604
* -dT SCRIPT:                            Options.            (line  490)
6605
* -dy:                                   Options.            (line  698)
6606
* -E:                                    Options.            (line  181)
6607
* -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  160)
6608
* -EB:                                   Options.            (line  200)
6609
* -EL:                                   Options.            (line  203)
6610
* -F:                                    Options.            (line  228)
6611
* -f:                                    Options.            (line  207)
6612
* -fini:                                 Options.            (line  252)
6613
* -G:                                    Options.            (line  261)
6614
* -g:                                    Options.            (line  258)
6615
* -hNAME:                                Options.            (line  269)
6616
* -i:                                    Options.            (line  278)
6617
* -IFILE:                                Options.            (line  831)
6618
* -init:                                 Options.            (line  281)
6619
* -LDIR:                                 Options.            (line  320)
6620
* -lNAMESPEC:                            Options.            (line  287)
6621
* -M:                                    Options.            (line  352)
6622
* -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  342)
6623
* -Map:                                  Options.            (line  891)
6624
* -N:                                    Options.            (line  394)
6625
* -n:                                    Options.            (line  389)
6626
* -non_shared:                           Options.            (line  715)
6627
* -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line  971)
6628
* -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  415)
6629
* -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  409)
6630
* -pie:                                  Options.            (line  990)
6631
* -q:                                    Options.            (line  425)
6632
* -qmagic:                               Options.            (line 1000)
6633
* -Qy:                                   Options.            (line 1003)
6634
* -r:                                    Options.            (line  438)
6635
* -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  457)
6636
* -rpath:                                Options.            (line 1041)
6637
* -rpath-link:                           Options.            (line 1063)
6638
* -S:                                    Options.            (line  472)
6639
* -s:                                    Options.            (line  468)
6640
* -shared:                               Options.            (line 1118)
6641
* -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  269)
6642
* -static:                               Options.            (line  715)
6643
* -t:                                    Options.            (line  477)
6644
* -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  481)
6645
* -Tbss ORG:                             Options.            (line 1190)
6646
* -Tdata ORG:                            Options.            (line 1190)
6647
* -Ttext ORG:                            Options.            (line 1190)
6648
* -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  503)
6649
* -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  511)
6650
* -V:                                    Options.            (line  530)
6651
* -v:                                    Options.            (line  530)
6652
* -X:                                    Options.            (line  540)
6653
* -x:                                    Options.            (line  536)
6654
* -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  555)
6655
* -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  546)
6656
* -z defs:                               Options.            (line  902)
6657
* -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  559)
6658
* -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line  910)
6659
* .:                                     Location Counter.   (line    6)
6660
* /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
6661
                                                             (line   21)
6662
* :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
6663
                                                             (line    6)
6664
* =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
6665
                                                             (line    6)
6666
* >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
6667
                                                             (line    6)
6668
* [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
6669
                                                             (line   29)
6670
* ABSOLUTE (MRI):                        MRI.                (line   33)
6671
* absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
6672
* absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
6673
* ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
6674
* ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
6675
* address, section:                      Output Section Address.
6676
                                                             (line    6)
6677
* ALIAS (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   44)
6678
* ALIGN (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   50)
6679
* align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
6680
* align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
6681
* ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
6682
* ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
6683
* ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
6684
                                                             (line    6)
6685
* ALIGNOF(SECTION):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   62)
6686
* allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
6687
* architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
6688
                                                             (line   72)
6689
* architectures:                         Options.            (line  105)
6690
* archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  287)
6691
* archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
6692
* arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line    6)
6693
* arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line    6)
6694
* ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line    6)
6695
* AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line   54)
6696
* ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
6697
                                                             (line    9)
6698
* assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
6699
                                                             (line    9)
6700
* assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line    6)
6701
* AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line    6)
6702
* AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line    6)
6703
* automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line  170)
6704
* back end:                              BFD.                (line    6)
6705
* BASE (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   54)
6706
* BE8:                                   ARM.                (line   23)
6707
* BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line   11)
6708
* BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line   16)
6709
* big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  200)
6710
* binary input format:                   Options.            (line  117)
6711
* BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line   75)
6712
* bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    6)
6713
* bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
6714
* bugs in ld:                            Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
6715
* BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
6716
                                                             (line    6)
6717
* C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
6718
                                                             (line   19)
6719
* CHIP (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   58)
6720
* COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line   29)
6721
* combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1238)
6722
* command files:                         Scripts.            (line    6)
6723
* command line:                          Options.            (line    6)
6724
* common allocation:                     Options.            (line  151)
6725
* common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
6726
                                                             (line   20)
6727
* common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
6728
                                                             (line    6)
6729
* compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  141)
6730
* constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line    6)
6731
* CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
6732
                                                             (line   19)
6733
* constructors:                          Options.            (line  511)
6734
* constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
6735
                                                             (line   19)
6736
* crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
6737
* CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
6738
                                                             (line    9)
6739
* creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line  137)
6740
* cross reference table:                 Options.            (line  777)
6741
* cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
6742
                                                             (line   56)
6743
* current output location:               Location Counter.   (line    6)
6744
* data:                                  Output Section Data.
6745
                                                             (line    6)
6746
* DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
6747
                                                             (line   80)
6748
* DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line  101)
6749
* DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line  107)
6750
* dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1174)
6751
* DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 1597)
6752
* default emulation:                     Environment.        (line   21)
6753
* default input format:                  Environment.        (line    9)
6754
* DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  118)
6755
* deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  536)
6756
* demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line   29)
6757
* demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line  818)
6758
* direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line  218)
6759
* discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
6760
                                                             (line    6)
6761
* discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line    6)
6762
* DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 1503)
6763
* DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 1628)
6764
* dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line    6)
6765
* dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line   36)
6766
* dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line   66)
6767
* dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line  831)
6768
* dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  181)
6769
* ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line    6)
6770
* emulation:                             Options.            (line  342)
6771
* emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line   21)
6772
* END (MRI):                             MRI.                (line   62)
6773
* endianness:                            Options.            (line  200)
6774
* entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line    6)
6775
* entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  160)
6776
* entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line   17)
6777
* ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line    6)
6778
* error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line   12)
6779
* example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line    6)
6780
* exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line   19)
6781
* expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line    6)
6782
* expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line    6)
6783
* expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
6784
* expressions:                           Expressions.        (line    6)
6785
* EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
6786
                                                             (line   13)
6787
* fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
6788
* file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
6789
                                                             (line    6)
6790
* FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line   61)
6791
* filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
6792
                                                             (line    9)
6793
* fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
6794
                                                             (line    6)
6795
* FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
6796
                                                             (line   39)
6797
* finalization function:                 Options.            (line  252)
6798
* first input file:                      File Commands.      (line   82)
6799
* first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line    6)
6800
* FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line   44)
6801
* FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING:                 ARM.                (line   57)
6802
* FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
6803
                                                             (line   20)
6804
* forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
6805
                                                             (line    6)
6806
* forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
6807
                                                             (line    6)
6808
* forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  434)
6809
* FORMAT (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   66)
6810
* functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line    6)
6811
* garbage collection <1>:                Input Section Keep. (line    6)
6812
* garbage collection:                    Options.            (line  852)
6813
* generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  415)
6814
* GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line    6)
6815
* GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line    9)
6816
* GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   47)
6817
* grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line   47)
6818
* groups of archives:                    Options.            (line  645)
6819
* H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line    6)
6820
* header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
6821
* heap size:                             Options.            (line 1539)
6822
* help:                                  Options.            (line  883)
6823
* holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line   12)
6824
* holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
6825
                                                             (line   39)
6826
* HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
6827
* HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
6828
* i960 support:                          i960.               (line    6)
6829
* image base:                            Options.            (line 1546)
6830
* implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
6831
                                                             (line    6)
6832
* import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line   10)
6833
* INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line    9)
6834
* including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line    9)
6835
* including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 1348)
6836
* incremental link:                      Options.            (line  278)
6837
* INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
6838
                                                             (line   25)
6839
* initialization function:               Options.            (line  281)
6840
* initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line   26)
6841
* input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line   35)
6842
* input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
6843
                                                             (line    9)
6844
* input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line   19)
6845
* input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  477)
6846
* input format:                          Options.            (line  117)
6847
* input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line   19)
6848
* input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
6849
                                                             (line    6)
6850
* input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
6851
                                                             (line    6)
6852
* input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
6853
                                                             (line    6)
6854
* input sections:                        Input Section.      (line    6)
6855
* INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   19)
6856
* INSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
6857
                                                             (line   30)
6858
* insert user script into default script: Miscellaneous Commands.
6859
                                                             (line   30)
6860
* integer notation:                      Constants.          (line    6)
6861
* integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line   12)
6862
* internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line   11)
6863
* invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line   14)
6864
* K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   12)
6865
* KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line    6)
6866
* l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   72)
6867
* lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line    6)
6868
* ld bugs, reporting:                    Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
6869
* LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line   21)
6870
* len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   72)
6871
* LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line   72)
6872
* LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  135)
6873
* library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
6874
* link map:                              Options.            (line  352)
6875
* link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line 1063)
6876
* linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
6877
* linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
6878
                                                             (line    6)
6879
* linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line    6)
6880
* linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line    6)
6881
* linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line    6)
6882
* linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line   19)
6883
* linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line    6)
6884
* linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line    6)
6885
* LIST (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   77)
6886
* little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  203)
6887
* LOAD (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   84)
6888
* load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line    6)
6889
* LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line  138)
6890
* loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
6891
                                                             (line   22)
6892
* local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  540)
6893
* location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line    6)
6894
* LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
6895
                                                             (line    6)
6896
* M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   12)
6897
* M68HC11 and 68HC12 support:            M68HC11/68HC12.     (line    6)
6898
* machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
6899
                                                             (line   72)
6900
* machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line    6)
6901
* mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line    6)
6902
* MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  143)
6903
* MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line    6)
6904
* memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line   32)
6905
* memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line    6)
6906
* memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
6907
                                                             (line    6)
6908
* memory usage:                          Options.            (line  895)
6909
* MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  146)
6910
* Motorola 68K GOT generation:           M68K.               (line    6)
6911
* MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line    6)
6912
* MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line   11)
6913
* NAME (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   90)
6914
* name, section:                         Output Section Name.
6915
                                                             (line    6)
6916
* names:                                 Symbols.            (line    6)
6917
* naming the output file:                Options.            (line  409)
6918
* NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
6919
* NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  389)
6920
* NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING:                  ARM.                (line  106)
6921
* NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING:                 ARM.                (line  113)
6922
* NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
6923
                                                             (line   56)
6924
* NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
6925
                                                             (line   22)
6926
* not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
6927
* o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   67)
6928
* objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line    6)
6929
* object file management:                BFD.                (line    6)
6930
* object files:                          Options.            (line   29)
6931
* object formats available:              BFD.                (line    6)
6932
* object size:                           Options.            (line  261)
6933
* OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  394)
6934
* opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line    6)
6935
* operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line    6)
6936
* options:                               Options.            (line    6)
6937
* ORDER (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   95)
6938
* org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   67)
6939
* ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line   67)
6940
* ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  156)
6941
* orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line    6)
6942
* output file after errors:              Options.            (line  965)
6943
* output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line   10)
6944
* output file name in linker script:     File Commands.      (line   64)
6945
* output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
6946
                                                             (line    6)
6947
* output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
6948
                                                             (line    6)
6949
* output section data:                   Output Section Data.
6950
                                                             (line    6)
6951
* OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line   64)
6952
* OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
6953
                                                             (line   72)
6954
* OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line   10)
6955
* OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
6956
                                                             (line    6)
6957
* overlays:                              Overlay Description.
6958
                                                             (line    6)
6959
* partial link:                          Options.            (line  438)
6960
* PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line    6)
6961
* PIC_VENEER:                            ARM.                (line  119)
6962
* position independent executables:      Options.            (line  992)
6963
* PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
6964
* PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   30)
6965
* PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
6966
* PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
6967
* PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   44)
6968
* PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line   48)
6969
* PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
6970
* PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
6971
* PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
6972
* PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
6973
* PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
6974
* PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
6975
* PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
6976
* PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
6977
* PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
6978
* precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line    6)
6979
* prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
6980
                                                             (line   22)
6981
* program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line    6)
6982
* program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
6983
                                                             (line    6)
6984
* program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
6985
* program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line    6)
6986
* PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line    6)
6987
* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line    6)
6988
* PUBLIC (MRI):                          MRI.                (line  103)
6989
* QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
6990
                                                             (line    6)
6991
* quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line    6)
6992
* read-only text:                        Options.            (line  389)
6993
* read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  394)
6994
* regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
6995
* relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
6996
* relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line 1006)
6997
* relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line    9)
6998
* relaxing on i960:                      i960.               (line   31)
6999
* relaxing on M68HC11:                   M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   12)
7000
* relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line   27)
7001
* relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
7002
* relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  438)
7003
* removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
7004
                                                             (line    6)
7005
* reporting bugs in ld:                  Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
7006
* requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line   16)
7007
* retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  425)
7008
* retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line 1027)
7009
* ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line   26)
7010
* round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
7011
* round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
7012
* runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  269)
7013
* runtime library search path:           Options.            (line 1041)
7014
* runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line  196)
7015
* scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line   12)
7016
* scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
7017
                                                             (line   20)
7018
* script files:                          Options.            (line  481)
7019
* scripts:                               Scripts.            (line    6)
7020
* search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  320)
7021
* search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line   74)
7022
* SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line   74)
7023
* SECT (MRI):                            MRI.                (line  109)
7024
* section address:                       Output Section Address.
7025
                                                             (line    6)
7026
* section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
7027
* section alignment:                     Builtin Functions.  (line   62)
7028
* section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1329)
7029
* section data:                          Output Section Data.
7030
                                                             (line    6)
7031
* section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
7032
                                                             (line    6)
7033
* section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line    6)
7034
* section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line  138)
7035
* section name:                          Output Section Name.
7036
                                                             (line    6)
7037
* section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
7038
                                                             (line    6)
7039
* section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
7040
* section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
7041
                                                             (line    6)
7042
* section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
7043
                                                             (line    6)
7044
* SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line    6)
7045
* sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
7046
                                                             (line    6)
7047
* segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 1190)
7048
* SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line  159)
7049
* segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line    6)
7050
* shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1120)
7051
* SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
7052
                                                             (line    6)
7053
* SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
7054
* SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
7055
* small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
7056
                                                             (line   20)
7057
* SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
7058
                                                             (line   58)
7059
* SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
7060
                                                             (line   54)
7061
* SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
7062
                                                             (line   46)
7063
* SPU:                                   SPU ELF.            (line   29)
7064
* SPU ELF options:                       SPU ELF.            (line    6)
7065
* SPU extra overlay stubs:               SPU ELF.            (line   19)
7066
* SPU local store size:                  SPU ELF.            (line   24)
7067
* SPU overlay stub symbols:              SPU ELF.            (line   15)
7068
* SPU overlays:                          SPU ELF.            (line    9)
7069
* SPU plugins:                           SPU ELF.            (line    6)
7070
* SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
7071
                                                             (line    6)
7072
* stack size:                            Options.            (line 1786)
7073
* standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line    7)
7074
* start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line    6)
7075
* STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line   82)
7076
* strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  468)
7077
* strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  472)
7078
* stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line 1027)
7079
* STUB_GROUP_SIZE:                       ARM.                (line  124)
7080
* SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
7081
                                                             (line    6)
7082
* suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line   12)
7083
* symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line  118)
7084
* symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line    6)
7085
* symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line    6)
7086
* symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  546)
7087
* symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line    6)
7088
* symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  457)
7089
* symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line  805)
7090
* symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line    6)
7091
* symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line 1027)
7092
* synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line 1006)
7093
* synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line   14)
7094
* TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line   35)
7095
* TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line   27)
7096
* TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line   32)
7097
* thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line   17)
7098
* TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
7099
* traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1169)
7100
* trampoline generation on M68HC11:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
7101
* trampoline generation on M68HC12:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
7102
* unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
7103
* undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  503)
7104
* undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
7105
                                                             (line   13)
7106
* undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1325)
7107
* uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
7108
                                                             (line    6)
7109
* unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
7110
                                                             (line   39)
7111
* usage:                                 Options.            (line  883)
7112
* USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line   69)
7113
* using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line   42)
7114
* using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line   22)
7115
* Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line  141)
7116
* variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line    6)
7117
* verbose:                               Options.            (line 1225)
7118
* version:                               Options.            (line  530)
7119
* version script:                        VERSION.            (line    6)
7120
* version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 1231)
7121
* VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line    6)
7122
* versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line    6)
7123
* VFP11_DENORM_FIX:                      ARM.                (line   78)
7124
* warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 1238)
7125
* warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 1329)
7126
* warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 1325)
7127
* weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line  386)
7128
* what is this?:                         Overview.           (line    6)
7129
* wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
7130
 
7131
 
7132
* Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line    6)
7133
7134
7135

7136
Tag Table:
7137
Node: Top750
7138
Node: Overview1524
7139
Node: Invocation2638
7140
Node: Options3046
7141
Node: Environment85511
7142
Node: Scripts87271
7143
Node: Basic Script Concepts89005
7144
Node: Script Format91712
7145
Node: Simple Example92575
7146
Node: Simple Commands95671
7147
Node: Entry Point96122
7148
Node: File Commands96881
7149
Node: Format Commands100882
7150
Node: Miscellaneous Commands102848
7151
Node: Assignments106227
7152
Node: Simple Assignments106718
7153
Node: PROVIDE108454
7154
Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN109659
7155
Node: Source Code Reference109903
7156
Node: SECTIONS113483
7157
Node: Output Section Description115374
7158
Node: Output Section Name116427
7159
Node: Output Section Address117303
7160
Node: Input Section118952
7161
Node: Input Section Basics119753
7162
Node: Input Section Wildcards122971
7163
Node: Input Section Common127704
7164
Node: Input Section Keep129186
7165
Node: Input Section Example129676
7166
Node: Output Section Data130644
7167
Node: Output Section Keywords133421
7168
Node: Output Section Discarding136990
7169
Node: Output Section Attributes138171
7170
Node: Output Section Type139175
7171
Node: Output Section LMA140329
7172
Node: Forced Output Alignment142842
7173
Node: Forced Input Alignment143110
7174
Node: Output Section Region143495
7175
Node: Output Section Phdr143925
7176
Node: Output Section Fill144589
7177
Node: Overlay Description145731
7178
Node: MEMORY150034
7179
Node: PHDRS154234
7180
Node: VERSION159273
7181
Node: Expressions167065
7182
Node: Constants167943
7183
Node: Symbols168504
7184
Node: Orphan Sections169242
7185
Node: Location Counter170406
7186
Node: Operators174842
7187
Node: Evaluation175764
7188
Node: Expression Section177128
7189
Node: Builtin Functions178617
7190
Node: Implicit Linker Scripts186584
7191
Node: Machine Dependent187359
7192
Node: H8/300188375
7193
Node: i960190000
7194
Node: M68HC11/68HC12191685
7195
Node: ARM193139
7196
Node: HPPA ELF32200389
7197
Node: M68K202012
7198
Node: MMIX202921
7199
Node: MSP430204086
7200
Node: PowerPC ELF32205135
7201
Node: PowerPC64 ELF64207749
7202
Node: SPU ELF212165
7203
Node: TI COFF214797
7204
Node: WIN32215323
7205
Node: Xtensa233680
7206
Node: BFD236802
7207
Node: BFD outline238257
7208
Node: BFD information loss239543
7209
Node: Canonical format242060
7210
Node: Reporting Bugs246417
7211
Node: Bug Criteria247111
7212
Node: Bug Reporting247810
7213
Node: MRI254849
7214
Node: GNU Free Documentation License259492

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.